Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. If the length of the elevation is changed. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. the door retains this relationship to the partition. schedules. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. For most tutorial projects. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. You learn the terminology.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. scope. quantities. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. In the Revit Architecture model. and schedules required for a building project. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. and plans. and open Metric\Templates. the operation of the software is parametric. and customize the project as necessary. how to navigate the user interface. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. every drawing sheet. In this case. As you work in drawing and schedule views. sections. the hierarchy of elements. hence. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. 2D and 3D view. 12 Select DefaultMetric. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. review the Revit Architecture templates. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition.rte. drawings. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . construction. In this case. If you move the partition. the floor or roof remains connected. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. drawing sheets. 13 Click OK. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. the parameter is one of association or connection. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. click Training Files. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. and phases when you need it. you will use the default template. and residential. and click Open.

levels. Examples include detail lines. tags. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. and 2D detail components. and cabinets are model components. walls. For example. doors. walls and roofs are hosts. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. dimensions. Understanding the Basics | 7 .When you change something. For example. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. For example. Datum elements help to define project context. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. windows. programming is not required. doors. windows. For example. and roofs are model elements. filled regions. They help to describe or document the model. and keynotes are annotation elements. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. dimensions. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. For example. If you can draw. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. They display in relevant views of the model. tags. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. and reference planes are datum elements. For example. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. grids.

Most often. and ceilings. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. elevation views. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. floors.In Revit Architecture. and types. and drawings of the design. Often. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. The project file contains all information for the building design. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . you can explicitly control them. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. This information includes components used to design the model. families. for example. In other cases. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. section views. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. However. top of wall. such as roofs. from geometry to construction data. views of the project. schedules. you do nothing to establish these relationships. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. and so forth). By using a single project file. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. Project: In Revit Architecture. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. you must be in a section or elevation view. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. To place levels. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. for example. first floor. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. or bottom of foundation.

such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. the user interface is labeled. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. In the steps that follow. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. categories of model elements include walls and beams. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. specifically its clear user interface. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). identical use. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . A type can be a specific size of a family. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. roofs. System families include walls. For example. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families can be transferred between projects. and similar graphical representation. A type can also be a style. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. In the following illustration. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. floors. making it easy to understand what each button represents. However. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. dimensions. For example. For example. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. ceilings. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. and levels. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). you can create different types of walls with different compositions.

In addition. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. click (New). By default. This creates a new project based on the default template. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction .Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name.

The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. and View. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . Edit. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. which are listed on the menu. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. you type the required key combination to perform the command. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. While working in the drawing area. For example. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR.

The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. On the left side of the Options Bar. For example. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. When you select the Door tool. a door type is specified. when you add a door.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. 9 In the Type Selector. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model.

There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. immediately below the Type Selector. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . containing buttons grouped by function. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. In the drawing area. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface.

TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. In the Project Browser. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction .11 Click OK. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. select Views (all). click the tab in the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser.

and group name. reports. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. family category (doors. sheets. To open a view. and rename views. elevations. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. double-click its name. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. The browser is dockable. Navigating the User Interface | 15 .You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. and groups. schedules. families. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. 3D). walls. delete. families. windows). The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add.

The cursor displays as a pencil. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. click Wall. After creating a browser organization scheme." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction .14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. In this case. In the bottom left corner of the window. Do not click. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. click Cancel. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. In addition. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. You can also press SHIFT+F1. regarding selected elements in a view. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. press F1 for help. You can use this tri-pane. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. 20 Press TAB. in conjunction with tooltips. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. Click the Help button. When you place the cursor over an element. If no Help button displays. After you are familiar with these tasks. find a keyword on the Index tab. Toolbar: From the toolbar. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. click Modify to end the Wall command. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. It highlights when the cursor is over it. There are several tools that help you find information. Tooltips: To see tooltips. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise.18 On the Design Bar. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. press F1 for context-sensitive help. In the status bar. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. click on the Standard toolbar. The status bar also provides information. Windows: From any window. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab.

you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). For example. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window.rvt. In the drawing area. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. In the following steps. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. There are several ways to access zoom options. the view zooms out from the building model. 5 On the View toolbar.

6 Click Zoom To Fit. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. . As you move the mouse. this is referred to as a crossing selection. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. If you do not have a wheel mouse. NOTE As you zoom in and out. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 10 To display SteeringWheels. 7 Click in the drawing area. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. the view zooms in on the selected area. To modify or add snap increments. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. on the View toolbar. When you release the mouse button.

it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. 17 Type ZR. bottoms. and click the SteeringWheels tab. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. press ESC. and select the wall. as shown. and then using the Zoom tool again. expand Floor Plans.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. expand Views (all). display along the ends. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Cnst. 15 To exit the wheel. referred to as shape handles. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. These are the drag controls. and click Help. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. For more information about SteeringWheels. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. Small blue dots. moving the wheel to the desired location. When drawing or modifying a building model. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. called drag controls. Similar controls. click Settings menu ➤ Options. To define settings for SteeringWheels. and double-click 2nd Flr.

23 Click next to the lower wall. and click again to specify the ending position. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. you want to move the table closer to the wall. as shown. require 2 clicks to complete the command.18 Click and drag the left control. Some commands. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. for example. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. such as Move and Copy. In this case. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. to lengthen the wall. click to specify the starting position. After selecting the element to move. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. and on the Tools toolbar. click (Move). The table moves down.

and click again to end it. or press CTRL+Z. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 24 Select the plant. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. Some commands. and drag it on top of the table. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. click Lines. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). The table and plant are returned to their original locations. All changes you make to a project are tracked. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In this example. such as the Lines command. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. 26 On the Undo menu. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . you decide that you prefer the table in its original position.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. select the second item in the list. on the Standard toolbar. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. click the Undo command. Move.

29 To end the command. On the Design Bar. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. 30 Close the file without saving your changes. click Modify. Press ESC twice.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. detail. illustrating how building components work together. In Revit Architecture. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. or referenced as a drafting view. and annotate building assemblies. but for training purposes. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. this tutorial uses imperial units only. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. When you have finished these tutorials. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. 27 .Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. Use detail components to define an assembly. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. In this tutorial. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file.

If necessary. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. click Training Files. click Drafting View. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. and click OK. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . scroll until the folder is displayed. import a DWG detail. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. create a reference callout. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will create a drafting view. and reference a drafting view. enter Window Head Detail.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Scale list. for Name.

In the Project Browser. The model zooms out. 10 In the drawing area. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. select Black and White. as shown. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail.dwg. displaying the extents of the detail. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. 6 In the Colors field list.). Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. The drawing area is still blank. click Training Files. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. located directly to the left of the drawing area. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. and click Open. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. 9 Type ZR.

11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 14 In the drawing area. select Detail View: Detail. 13 Click Reference other view. and in the Scale list. 12 On the Options Bar. click Callout. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. in the Type Selector. to activate the view selection list. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”.The view displays to the specified area.

select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. 2 On the Options Bar. c_express_workshop_details_start. you will create a detail view defined by a callout.The reference callout is created. 3 In the drawing area. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. double-click the reference callout tag head. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise.rvt. adjust the detail view display settings. select Callout. select Detail View: Detail. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. in the Type Selector. and in the Scale list. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

click Modify to clear the selection. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. 4 Right-click Detail 0. for Name. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. under Detail Views(Detail). enter Wall Base 1. under Detail Views (Detail). 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. 8 On the Design Bar. double-click Wall Base 1. and click OK. 6 In the drawing area.

This is the view crop region. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. bordered by a solid line. Model-Based Detailing | 33 . 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region.

The model elements in the view display as half-tones. select As Underlay. 16 Click OK. right-click.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. 14 In the drawing area. 13 On the View Control Bar. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. for Display Model. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Hide Crop Region). 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click View Properties. under Graphics. and click OK.

20 In the drawing area. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model.Brick on Mtl. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . Stud.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. click Detail Components. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. and press ENTER. 19 In the Type Selector. By grouping detail components. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . on the Options Bar. typical details can easily be placed. type 1' 6''. If the crop region is enlarged. 17 On the View Control Bar. Directly above the drawing area. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail.

as shown. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. 23 Using the same method. 25 In the Project Browser. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . expand Groups ➤ Detail. click Modify to end the command. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. and click Create Instance. add the following detail components as shown.

29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously.28 Press ESC to end the command. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation.4" Slab detail. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 .

Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. map keynotes by material. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Keynote ➤ Element. in the type selector. and under Keynote Table. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. and format keynote styles. In the next exercise. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 4 On the Options Bar. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. You can customize this list. for Full Path. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. click Browse. click Training Files. c_express_workshop_details_start. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. and verify that Horizontal. For more information about customizing a keynote database.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. special notes. Leader.txt. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. or instructions within a construction documentation package. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. and Free End are selected.rvt.

use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. 9 Press ESC to end the command. Keynoting | 39 . If no value has been specified.5 In the drawing area. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. Either move the text inside.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. a question mark displays. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. 7 Click to place the leader arm. 8 Click to place the tag.

40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 13 Click to place the tag.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. 12 Click to place the leader arm. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. click Keynote ➤ Material. 15 Select 07 21 00.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 16 In the drawing area. You will now change all keynotes to keys only. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only.

All items within the selection display in red. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. Only the keynotes remain selected. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents.Boxed. Click Check None. 17 On the Options Bar. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. legends. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. 19 In the Type Selector. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. Creating Details with Revit Architecture. Select Keynote Tags. Click OK. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 .

42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. In this lesson. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. and modify and update the project sheet title block. Update drawing sheet and project information. this tutorial uses imperial units only. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. you will create a sheet. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. Add labels to a title block. In this exercise. but for training purposes. Place views on drawing sheets.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. update the project information element properties.

■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start.rvt. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the Project Browser. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If necessary. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. click Training Files. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. scroll until the folder is displayed. or in the element properties of the title block. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. In Revit Architecture. 3 Click OK.

5 In the drawing area. To zoom in and out. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .4 Type ZR. and click Rename. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. double-click Checker.Unnamed. For Name. Smith and press ENTER. enter Sections/Details. 9 In the Project Browser. enter A602. To pan. 6 In the Title Block. click Modify to clear the selection. hold down the wheel and drag. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Design Bar. roll the wheel. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. you can enter ZE to zoom out. In this tutorial. 7 Enter K. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. right-click A602 . under Sheets(all). Then. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. Click OK. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command.

Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. in the Type Selector. enter J. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. enter Freighthouse Flats. For Project Name. 20 Click and type Project Status. 18 On the Options Bar. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. enter Design Development. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Type ZR.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. select the title block. enter 4/10/2008. 15 In the Options Bar. For Client Name. select Text : 1/8''. 13 Click OK. click Text. The Family Editor opens. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. (Left) is selected. Smith. For Project Status.

27 Select Wrap between parameters only. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. as shown. select Label : 3/16''. and verify that (Top) are selected. in the Type Selector. 29 On the Design Bar. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click.21 On the Design Bar. 22 Using the same method. click (Load into Project). to add 28 Using the same method. click Label. and click OK. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. as shown. 23 On the Design Bar. click Modify to exit the command. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. add Project Issue Date parameter. under Category Parameters. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown.

you will create. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. In this exercise. place and modify a keynote legend. for Name. and click Yes. a viewport displays. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. click Training Files. representing the view or schedule. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. enter Keynote Legend . by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. click Browse. to a drawing sheet.Project.30 In the Reload Family dialog. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. select Override parameter values of existing types. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. for Full Path. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. Next you will create.txt. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . and under Keynote Table.

under Text. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text.Sections/Details. 8 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). and click OK.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. and drag Keynote Legend . clear Show Headers. expand Legends. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . on the Appearance tab. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. as shown.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. double-click A601 .

and zoom in on the Keynote Legend . Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection.9 Press ESC to clear the selection. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown.Project as shown. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. The keynote legend is visible. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 .

19 Click OK twice. under Legends. for View Name.Project. not keynotes. 15 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet.Sheet. and click OK. The Keynote Legend is now blank. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. at the bottom of the Filter tab. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. right-click Keynote Legend . 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . enter Keynote Legend . and click OK. expand Detail Views (Detail). click Edit. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. for Filter. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. as shown. select Filter by sheet.

displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. The view title with line displays below the viewport. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser.Title Sheet 1. as shown. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. under Sheets (all). double-click A0 . Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. 2 In the Project Browser. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet.The keynote legend is automatically updated. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. and then add and update a Drawing list. The view remains selected.

3 In the Type Selector. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and zoom in on the drawing list. as shown. or omit view titles from sheets. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. Revit Architecture displays a view title. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark.When you place a view on a sheet. define the information to include in a view title. by default. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. expand Schedules/Quantities. You can specify text attributes for view titles. As part of a construction document set. 6 Type ZR. The drawing list remains selected. Press ESC to clear the selection. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. 5 In the Project Browser.

while pressing SHIFT.Ceiling Plans.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. The drawing list display is updated. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Appears In Drawing List. 8 In the Project Browser. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. under Sheets (all). select A602 . right-click the selected sheets. under Identity Data. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . and click Properties.Sections/Details and select A801 . including only sheets that contain views. and click OK.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. If the grid moves. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. As you develop the building design. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. a curtain wall. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. the wall or column will move with it. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. 57 . a central service core. After the beginning exercises. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. For example. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. it is good practice to test the constraints. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software.

from the product library. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. Creating the Project In this exercise. 5 Click OK. under Projects. under Create new. such as a door or window. The project is stored as a single file. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. and customize the project as necessary. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. South. 3 Under Template file. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. notice four elevation markers. In practice. locate the Project Browser.rte. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. and settings. you load any required family type that is not in your project. click New. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. West. levels. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. click Training Files. and click Browse. construction. select Project. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. you will use the default template. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. and residential. 2 In the New Project dialog. with an RVT extension. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. views. but contains no geometry. verify that the second option is selected. For this project. you design inside the elevation markers. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. In views that display elevation markers. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. East. To create the project file. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . In the drawing area in the right pane. The new project opens.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. you use a template that is provided with the software.

As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. and duplicate levels. then expand Floor Plans. These views are customizable: you can rename them. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. double-click South. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). and delete them. 8 Under Floor Plans. such as schedules and legends. duplicate them. Sheets (all). and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). Creating the Project | 59 . You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work.rvt) is selected. and families in your project. delete. and other properties. As you design and document your building model. sheets. verify that Project Files (*. heights. 14 For File name.The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. Families. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. 10 In the Project Browser. schedules. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. expand Views (all). 7 If necessary. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. Ceiling Plans. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. and elevation views created in the project by the template. the view you see in the drawing area. and on the General tab. will be accessible from the Project Browser. notice the Legends. created by the template. and click Training Files. 13 In the file window. view the Save reminder interval. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. you will want to save your work frequently. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. You can add. reflected ceiling plan views. Schedules/Quantities. 15 For Save as type. Groups. content and building model reports. 16 Click Save. double-click Metric. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. NOTE If you create a project without a template. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. and Elevations (Building Elevation). enter Revit Retail Building. Two level lines. change their properties.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. display in the south elevation. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. as well as change their names.

and double-click South. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. and press ENTER. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. so that when one level moves. enter 00 Foundation. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. You change the names of the 2 default levels. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. Adding Project Levels on page 60.17 Proceed to the next exercise. doors. After you modify the two default levels. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. When you begin designing. and windows within the building model. You learn how the levels are locked. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. or constrained. the other levels move and change with it. to each other. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . expand Views (all). you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls.

The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. view the Design Bar. right-click. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. enter 0. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. Next. and then move it up. which should display by default. If it does not. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. When you add the new level. and press ENTER. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. and click OK. This is the Options Bar. enter -1800. 14 Click Plan View Types. 16 Enter 3750. click Level. Adding Project Levels | 61 . and press ENTER. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. 13 On the Options Bar. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. 5 In the Project Browser. enter 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. and press ENTER. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. and press ESC. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. As you move the cursor. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. not all the tabs are visible. By default.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. and click Basics.

27 Rename the level 03 Level. click Modify to end the command. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. and move it slightly upward. 26 Press ESC. 25 Click to place the level line. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. you add another level. 23 On the Options Bar. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. Next. under Floor Plans. click Rename. and rename the corresponding views. and for Offset.18 In the Project Browser. enter 3750. or on the Design Bar. right-click Level 3. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. using a different option. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. and enter 02 Level. 19 Click OK. If you create a level by copying it. click Level. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. 21 In the Project Browser. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. click (Pick Lines). add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level.

the levels are no longer constrained. If you select a level and click its lock. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. all the levels move. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. Notice that by moving the top level.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. and you can move them independently. Adding Project Levels | 63 . 33 Proceed to the next exercise. as shown. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line.

under Floor Plans. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. and specify the grid line endpoint. When the grid is complete. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. double-click 00 Foundation. specify a start point for the grid line. click Modify. click Grid. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . so that if the roof elevation changes. In the following exercise. select (Draw). you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor up. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. you constrain the column heights to the roof level.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. the column height changes as well. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. In a later exercise. On the Design Bar.

use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. and click to place the line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. for Offset. Next. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. enter 4500 mm. Click to place the grid line. Enter A. On the Options Bar. for Offset. click Grid. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. click (Pick Lines). Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. enter 7500 mm. enter 7500 mm. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. and press ENTER. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. and click to place the line.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. and click to place the line. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. On the Options Bar. and for Offset. Creating a Column Grid | 65 .

8 Press ESC. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. and specify the grid line endpoint. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Grid. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. as shown. 11 On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. click Grid.

click Dimension. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. 15 Starting with grid line A. click Dimension. 18 On the Design Bar.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. 14 On the Options Bar. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . click (Aligned). 22 While pressing CTRL. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. select grid lines C and 3. 21 Press ESC twice. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble.

If necessary.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position.5mm Bubble with Gap. click Modify. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. click the value for Center Segment. (Element Properties). The pins are hidden. and select None. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and press ESC. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 31 For End Segments Length. until it is closer to grid line 5. and on the Options Bar. enter 50mm. click Modify. 33 On the Design Bar. click and drag the blue circular grip up. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. and select grid line A. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. At the left endpoint of the grid line. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. click . At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. and press ESC. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 32 Click OK twice. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. until it is closer to grid line A. select grid line 5. 24 Press ESC. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. By pinning these central grid lines. 26 In the drawing area. enter 6. click Edit/New. 29 In the Name dialog. Two pins display on the grid lines. and click OK. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. click Duplicate.

select Grid : 6. and in the Type Selector.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type.5mm Bubble with Gap. For Place By. select all of the grid lines. 37 Select the grid lines again. select Grid : 6. The original continuous grid lines are restored. click Modify. 35 In the Type Selector. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. click (Grid Intersection).5mm Bubble. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). 36 On the Design Bar. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. click Structural Column. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. click Finish. and press ESC. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . and on the Options Bar.

46 On the Options Bar. 43 Press ESC. 45 While pressing CTRL. click Activate Dimensions. click Camera. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 47 Enter 9000.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. double-click 01 Entry Level. lock it. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. for From. If it is unlocked. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. select 01 Entry Level. Next. select grid line A. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. under Floor Plans. 48 On the Standard toolbar. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 52 On the Options Bar. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. and press ENTER. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. and unlock it.

■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns. Creating a Column Grid | 71 . The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. and click to place the target point of the camera. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display.

In the Rename View dialog. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 57 Proceed to the next exercise. enter To Building. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. displays in bold under 3D Views. named 3D View 1 by default. When you finish adding beams. under Views (all). Right-click 3D View 1. and click OK. and click Rename. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. expand 3D Views.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. The current view. Adding Beams on page 72. Adding Beams In this exercise. and then copy them to subsequent levels.

The view is currently set to Coarse. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. 7 On the Options Bar. select each grid line. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. Adding Beams | 73 . 9 On the Options Bar. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . 4 Click Medium. The selected grid lines display as red.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. double-click 01 Entry Level. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. click Finish. the icon on the right side of the scale. view the icons on the View Control Bar. click Beam. 8 While pressing CTRL. click (Create Beam On Grid). under 3D Views.

right-click. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. under Floor Plans. click Modify. click (Default 3D View). 12 On the View toolbar. select 02 Level. and click Select All Instances.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. press and hold SHIFT. double-click 01 Entry Level. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. and click OK. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. select 06 Roof. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. 14 Select one of the beams. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. 13 On the Design Bar.

20 Click Cancel. 21 With the column selected. click 24 Press ESC. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. for Top Level. and click OK. under Constraints. double-click To Building. right-click. under 3D Views. view the Top Level parameter. 06 Roof. and click Select All Instances. (Element Properties). 19 In the Element Properties dialog. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. select 06 Roof.to the 5th level. Adding Beams | 75 . The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. right-click. and click Element Properties. resize the view to see the entire structure. under Instance Parameters. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. When you created the columns. 25 In the Project Browser. All of the columns display as red. 22 On the Options Bar. and if necessary. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns.

You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . as lines only. but you want to display them in less detail. under Elevations. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 28 Save the drawing. double-click South. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines.

To better add the braces to the structure. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. Adding Braces In this exercise. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. Adding Braces | 77 . double-click 00 Foundation. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. Adding Braces on page 77. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser.29 Proceed to the next exercise. and press ESC to end the command. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. under Floor Plans. click Framing Elevation. you create 8 framing elevation views. verify that Attach to Grid is selected.

add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. 7 On the Design Bar. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. double-click the elevation marker arrow. After you add the final brace. press ESC twice. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. and when the endpoint snap displays. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. click to specify the start point of the brace. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. The associated framing elevation view displays. 8 In the Type Selector. 11 Using the same technique. but when placed the braces are placed. click Brace. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected.

Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. delete it and redraw it. enter 18000 mm. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. The height of the roof lowers. Adding Braces | 79 . IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. and press ENTER.

(Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. 14 On the Standard toolbar.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. but this time add them from right to left. and press ENTER. double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . enter 10000 mm. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid.

and on the Options Bar. and click the lock that displays to unlock it.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. 21 Select grid line A. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). under Floor Plans. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. 19 In the Project Browser. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. NOTE As you add braces. and press ENTER. double-click 00 Foundation. click Activate Dimensions. enter 12000 mm. 23 In the Project Browser. as shown in the 3D view below. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. Adding Braces | 81 .

under Elevations. 31 Save the drawing. and drag it away from the structure. double-click 00 Foundation. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. Test connectivity of the columns. under Floor Plans. 26 In the Project Browser. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. double-click South. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. lock it. grid size. beams. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. click and roof height.24 In the Project Browser. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. and if necessary. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click {3D}. 28 On the Standard toolbar. 29 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Creating a Foundation on page 82. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm.

select Unlimited. and how to load specific families into a project. After you load the pile cap family. The foundation pile cap now displays. double-click 00 Foundation. Click OK twice. under Extents. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). click Edit. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. A warning displays. under View Depth. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm.rfa. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. expand Families. Creating a Foundation | 83 . for Level. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. for View Range. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. In the View Range dialog. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. under Floor Plans. The pile cap has been added in the view. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.Before you can add the pile caps. In the Element Properties dialog. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. and click View Properties. and expand Structural Foundations. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. 9 Close the warning dialog. and drag it to the drawing area. and press ESC twice. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them.

Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. When the final pile cap is placed. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. press ESC twice. and click Create Similar. 13 In the Project Browser. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. under 3D Views.

All columns in the building model display as red. under 3D Views. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . you change the types of the columns. double-click {3D}. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and braces that you used to create the building structure. and click Select All Instances.14 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Select one of the columns. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. beams. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise.rvt. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. You load new column. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. and brace families into the project. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click. click Training Files. beam. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure.

9. enter 75mm. 18 In the Type Selector. 15 In the Project Browser. and click Select All Instances. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. click Modify. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. and click OK. 17 While pressing CTRL. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 10 On the Options Bar. click Modify. double-click Elevation 1-a. enter 75mm. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. the braces as well as the beams change. and changing its size parameter. 9 In the Type Selector. 13 In the Name dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. for Type. but it is the only size of its type currently available. click Duplicate. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. right-click. 19 On the Design Bar. In the following steps. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Brace. The brace type changes. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. 6 In the Type Selector.6X15. for d.3 In the Type Selector. The building model displays the round hollow columns. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Default 3D View). 7 On the Design Bar.2X101.5CHS. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. click Modify. 16 On the Design Bar. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. This not the size that you want to use. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). click Edit/New. click (Element Properties). under Dimensions. you change the brace type. select the braces in the elevation one by one. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type.

select Auto . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Linking the Structural Model on page 87.rvt. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog.Origin to Origin. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. select m_RRB_structure_complete.rvt. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . After the files are linked.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and click Open. 3 Under Positioning. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model.

You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. however. 9 In the drawing area. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. while pressing CTRL. depending on the project. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. 6 In the drawing area. select Levels 00 through 06. In this case. structural members.4 In the Project Browser. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. select Multiple. 5 On the Tools toolbar. 8 On the Options Bar. and click Select Link. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. click (Copy/Monitor). After the link is established. select the linked Revit model. double-click South. and walls could also be copy/monitored. under Elevations. Grids. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Copy.

11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click OK. 15 In the New Plan dialog. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. for Floor Plan views. under Floor Plans. First. while pressing SHIFT. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. right-click Level 1. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). and click Delete. 13 On the Design Bar.10 On the Options Bar. click Finish mode. 18 Using the same method. click Finish. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. 16 Click OK. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. delete the Level 2 floor plan.

double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans. 25 In the View Templates dialog. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 21 In the drawing area. right-click. select the Topography : Surface. right-click. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. 26 In the Project Browser. for Name. 20 In the drawing area. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. click OK. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .19 In the Project Browser. enter Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level. 24 In the New View Template dialog. under Floor Plans. and click OK.

under Floor Plans. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. click Camera. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. and click OK. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . select Floor Plans. 34 In the 3D view that displays. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. under Names. double-click Site.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. enter To Building. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . stairs. right-click 3D View 1. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. 36 In the Rename View dialog. expand 3D Views. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and click OK. and railings are also created from sketches. Adding Floors on page 92. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors.rvt. Some other Revit Architecture elements. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. Adding Floors In this exercise. such as roofs. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. To create floors.35 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. In this exercise.

■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. past the first vertical grid line. under Floor Plans. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Dimension. Adding Floors | 93 . and then the first horizontal grid line. If the grid changes size. click Lines. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. On the Sketch tab. click Floor. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. On the Options Bar. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. Do not lock the dimension. At the top left corner of the grid. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. You are now in the Sketch Editor. Leave this dimension unlocked. Move the cursor to the left. click (Rectangle).Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. and elements in the current view display as gray. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. select the top floor line.

and click the temporary dimension value. select the top floor line. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Move the cursor to the left dimension. Enter 300. They display on the floor sketch. At the top left corner of the grid.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. ■ 7 On the Design Bar. press ENTER. Do not lock the dimensions. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. and change their values to 300 mm. Select and lock the dimensions. and then press ESC. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Modify.

and lock the dimensions. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. Next. and press ESC. click (Pick Lines). 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. using a different sketching technique.8 Select the floor. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. On the Options Bar. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. click Quit Sketch. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. On the Sketch tab. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. double-click 02 Level. click Lines. enter 1500mm. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. click Edit. Select the three remaining floor lines. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. on the Design Bar. Adding Floors | 95 . under Floor Plans. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. and for Offset. and on the Options Bar. click Floor. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model.

double-click 03 Level. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. 18 On the Options Bar. The 02 Level floor displays. 16 On the Design Bar. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. 14 On the Design Bar. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 17 On the Sketch tab. 20 On the Tools toolbar. click Floor. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. and a lock icon displays. Click the locks to constrain the floors. click Finish Sketch. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. click (Align). click (Rectangle). 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. click Lines. under Floor Plans. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor.

double-click 01 Entry Level. 35 On the Sketch tab. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. Alternatively. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. and click OK. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. 31 In the Project Browser. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. under Views ➤ 3D Views. 32 Select the floor. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. click Finish Sketch. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. Adding Floors | 97 . under Floor Plans. click Finish Sketch. click Edit. under Floor Plans. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. select 05 Roof Garden. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. double-click 05 Roof Garden.24 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. and lock the edges. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. double-click {3D}.

You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. Adding a Roof In this exercise. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. under Floor Plans. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ For Offset.rvt. 3 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. When a blue dashed line displays. enter 1800 mm. Adding a Roof on page 98. Click (Pick Lines). 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . To create the roof. and press ENTER. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click 06 Roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. click to place the roof line.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof.

and when the blue dashed line displays. enter 300 mm. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). click to place the roof line. Adding a Roof | 99 .6 Select grid line 5. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). for Offset. 7 On the Options Bar.

11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. select the roof. ■ 12 On the Design Bar. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Finish Roof. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). click (Trim/Extend).10 Press ESC. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5.

click Section. on grid D. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. 15 On the Options Bar. click Modify. move the cursor down below the roof. for Elevation. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to specify the section. 17 On the Design Bar. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof.14 On the Options Bar. enter -100 mm. click (Add new points to the slab shape). The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. and press ENTER. Adding a Roof | 101 .

select Variable. 24 In the Project Browser. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. under Construction. for Structure. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. click Edit/New. click Modify. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. click Edit. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). under Floor Plans. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. (Element Properties). select the roof. for Structure [1]. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog.20 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. In section. 30 Click OK 3 times. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. double-click 06 Roof.

and press DELETE. zoom in to the roof. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan.31 On the Design Bar. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. select each edge. moving counter-clockwise. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. click OK. 38 In the 3D view. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. click (Default 3D View). 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 40 In the Type Selector. 37 If necessary. on the View Control Bar. Adding a Roof | 103 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Modify. 33 In the warning dialog. select Fascia : Fascia . 41 Starting with the left front edge. select the section line. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. In this case. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window.Roof Edge.

under 3D Views. click Modify. you add a curtain wall. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. 44 Proceed to the next exercise.42 On the Design Bar. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. the curtain wall resizes with it. double-click To Building. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. so if you resize the grid.

Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. click to place the first curtain wall segment. click Wall. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. enter 2100 mm. for Spacing. for Join Condition. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. The type is saved in the project. For Level. select 05 Roof Garden. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Spacing. and move it slightly toward the building interior. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. For Height. click Training Files. For Offset. When you duplicate a type. click 01 Entry Level. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). click Edit/New. click Duplicate. enter 1050 mm. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. select 01 Entry Level. for Type.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. Under Construction. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. under Floor Plans. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . 6 In the Name dialog. enter 600 mm. 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. Click OK twice. enter Retail Storefront. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 3 In the Type Selector. and click OK.

106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Dimension. and trim each curtain wall segment. so they remain in the view.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. 15 On the View Control Bar. These dimensions are not in a sketch. click (Trim/Extend). View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. you can delete the dimensions. If you want to hide them. If the grid moves. double-click To Building. 13 On the Design Bar. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. under 3D Views. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. and lock the dimensions.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. Creating an Entrance In this exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Training Files. Creating an Entrance | 107 .rvt. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. Creating an Entrance on page 107.

and click None. and double-click South. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). as these usually represent internal pilasters. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. 7 Click OK. clear one element to clear all the elements. under the element list.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. Do not select Columns. 4 On the Model Categories tab. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click All. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . To better work with the curtain wall panels. 2 On the View Control Bar. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. All the elements in the list are selected. 5 Under Visibility. under Views (all). 6 Under Visibility. click Detail Level ➤ Medium.

in this case an architectural elevation. Creating an Entrance | 109 . 12 With the panels selected. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. 17 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. in the Type Selector. 10 Select 1 panel. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. double-click {3D}. select Architectural Elevation. select System Panel : Solid. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. 16 On the View Control Bar.9 On the Design Bar. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. press and hold CTRL. under 3D Views. 18 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click Modify. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. double-click To Building. 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 21 Zoom to the front of the building.19 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 20 In the Project Browser. double-click South. under Elevations (Building Elevation).

and unpin it. 27 On the Options Bar. click Add or Remove Segments. click Curtain Grid. Creating an Entrance | 111 . and click to select it. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. select One Segment. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. select another mullion to the right. 32 In the Type Selector. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. click Modify. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. 24 On the Options Bar.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. 30 On the Design Bar. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections).

37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. 36 Zoom in to the first panel. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. select it. 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Default 3D View). 34 On the View toolbar. press TAB until it is selected. and unpin it. and view the new entrance.

remove the mullions from the 2nd. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and 4th panels. 3rd. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 .38 Press DELETE. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. 39 Using the same process. open the North elevation. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. 40 Optionally. 41 Proceed to the next exercise.

114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. under Graphics. for Underlay. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. select 02 Level. and click View Properties. 5 Click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 3 Right-click in the view.

■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. 9 In the Project Browser. enter Display Area. 10 In the Rename View dialog. and click to complete the callout. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. 8 Select the callout. and click Rename. and click OK. which indicates you must draw the callout. under Floor Plans. The cursor changes to a pencil.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. click Callout. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. select the grip closest to the callout head. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 .

116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Flip Section. 16 Select the section box. 12 Draw a section line. click Section. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. as shown. 14 Press ESC. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. right-click. 13 Select the section line.

select Wall faces. 25 Press ESC twice. enter Section Display Area. For Loc Line. under Floor Plans. expand Sections (Building Section). Lock both alignments. 27 On the Options Bar.17 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. select Basic Wall : Interior . double-click 01 Entry Level. click (Align). 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. 18 In the Rename View dialog. 24 On the Tools toolbar. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. and click OK. for Prefer. 21 In the Type Selector.135mm Partition (2-hr). 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). click Wall. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . select Finish Face: Exterior. right-click Section 1. 26 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. Click (Rectangle).

Notice that the walls extend to the floor. 32 In the Type Selector.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting.) 36 Press ESC twice. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. 37 In the Project Browser. 38 On the View Control Bar. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. and lock the dimension. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. Next. click Ceiling. double-click 01 Entry Level. and lock the dimension. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Ceiling Plans. under Sections (Building Section). you modify them to be bulkhead walls. double-click Section Display Area.

42 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to select the walls. click Modify. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. for Base Offset. and press ESC. Select the 02 Level Floor. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. and click OK. 43 On the Design Bar. enter 2700 mm. and click (Element Properties). double-click Section Display Area. On the Options Bar. under Constraints. double-click 01 Entry Level. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. under Sections. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. and click to select the walls. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . enter 2700 mm. under Ceiling Plans. for Height Offset From Level. for Top/Base. and click OK. 41 On the Options Bar. click Attach. click (Element Properties). 46 Press ESC. press TAB until you select the wall chain. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. 47 In the Project Browser. click to select it. under Constraints.

49 In the Project Browser. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 55 In the Type Properties dialog. for Type. view the ceiling structure. click Cancel. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. click Cancel. click Edit/New. for Structure. click (Rotate). 54 Click OK. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. under Ceiling Plans. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. under Construction. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. and click . double-click 01 Entry Level. click Edit. 58 On the Edit toolbar. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling.

enter 45.60 Click. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . 61 Press ESC. 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. and press ENTER.

122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. 64 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows Off. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. under 3D Views. click Shadows On. 65 On the View Control Bar. 66 Optionally. double-click To Building.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser.

3 On the Options Bar. enter 1500 mm. double-click 01 Entry Level. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and for Offset. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. Move the cursor over grid line B. and click to create a reference plane to the right. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click to create a reference plane to the left. and copy it to the 05 Level. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C.rvt. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. click Ref Plane. under Floor Plans. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building.

and specify a point to create first stair flight. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 7 Using the same method.5 On the Design Bar. shorten the right reference plane. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. click Stairs. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. C. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. 2. and 3. 6 Select the left reference plane.

Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . select Basic Wall : Generic . Click (Rectangle). 10 On the Options Bar. click Wall. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. including its handrails.225mm Masonry. and specify a point. Move the cursor down.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. beyond the end of the stair. 12 In the Type Selector. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. The complete stair displays. select Finish Face: Interior. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. and select the 2nd reference plane.

and specify a point away from the wall. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. select the dimension value. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. click Dimension. and lock the alignment. and click to select it. Select the interior face of the wall. Select the bottom of the stair. select Wall faces. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . for Prefer. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 18 Using the same technique. enter 1200 mm. Select the wall.15 On the Tools toolbar. click Align. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. Lock the dimension. and press ENTER. Click Modify. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing.

29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. and press DELETE. TIP To flip the door swing. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 .21 Select the dimension. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. 23 Select the stair. select both reference planes. 25 While pressing CTRL. (Undo). 28 On the Options Bar. and press DELETE. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. The stair and walls move to the left. Because the dimension is constrained. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. clear Tag on Placement. 24 On the Standard toolbar. 27 In the Type Selector. a warning displays. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. click Door.

41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select 05 Roof Garden. click Modify. for Base Constraint. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. for Multistory Top Level. and move the cursor to spin the building model. select all 4 walls. 33 Select the stair. 35 On the View toolbar. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). (Default 3D View). Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. (SteeringWheels). double-click 01 Entry Level. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans.30 On the Design Bar. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. (Rectangle). You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. Click OK. Click OK. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. click 36 On the View toolbar. (Element Properties). 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. click Align. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. For Top Constraint. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 44 On the Tools toolbar. Under Constraints. but if you view the top level of the building. select 00 Foundation.

47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. (SteeringWheels). Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . click see the roof. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. on the View toolbar. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). and lock the alignment. and click OK. and lock the alignments.46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. 52 In the Select Levels dialog.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor.55 In the Project Browser. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. By offsetting the base. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). select Up to Level: 06 Roof. For Top Constraint. Under Constraints. double-click 01 Entry Level. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. 56 Select the shaft. under Floor Plans. for Base Offset. click 59 On the View toolbar. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. (Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels). enter 300 mm.

click Wall.rvt. for Underlay. and click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . double-click 05 Roof Garden. and click OK. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. under Floor Plans. under Graphics.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select 06 Roof. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 Right-click in the view. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser.

and press ENTER. 15 In the error dialog. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. click Edit Profile. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay.225mm Masonry. 16 On the Design Bar. and click Open View. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. select Elevation: South. click . 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. and click (Fillet arc). click Lines. enter 9750. Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. select Basic Wall : Generic . click (Align). 11 In the Go To View dialog. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines.5 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 17 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. and then select the right face of the wall. The exact placement is not important. and on the Options Bar. click Remove Constraints. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3.

select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. 22 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 .18 In the upper right corner of the profile. click . and click (Circle). click Finish Sketch. 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest.

24 Proceed to the next exercise. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. select Planter : 1220 x 1220. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . under Floor Plans. click Component. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Basics tab. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. double-click 05 Roof Garden.4.5 Meters. and press ESC twice. 3 In the Type Selector. as shown. TIP After you place the 1st planter. click Training Files. click Component. select M_RPC Tree . 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. between grid lines C and D.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry .

and in the Type Selector.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. select M_RPC Tree . and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. enter Japanese Cherry 1. 17 While pressing CTRL. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. for Height. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click {3D}. 21 On the Design Bar. enter 1500 mm. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. under Dimensions. 18 In the Project Browser. for Type. and then click OK twice. as shown. click Edit/New. and on the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View). 14 In the Name dialog. click Floor. For Offset.5 Meters. under Floor Plans. (Element Properties). 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube.5 Meters. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 2400 mm. double-click 01 Entry Level. 16 Click Apply. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Lines. under 3D Views. select the 2 remaining trees. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). under Floor Plans. 10 In the Project Browser. 11 Select one of the trees. click Duplicate.8 On the View toolbar. View the roof. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click OK.

Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . 29 On the Options Bar. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. enter 0 mm. for Offset. and click to place the line. and click to sketch a line. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. click (Draw).23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. 25 Using the same method. 28 Select the right vertical floor line. 26 On the Options Bar. and click to sketch a line.

and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 35 Select the line that you just drew. clear Chain. and click to finish the line. click (Trim/Extend). 32 Press ESC. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. 34 On the Tools toolbar. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. and click to finish the line. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. move the cursor up 900 mm.30 On the Options Bar. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1.

click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. 43 Click OK twice. and click so he is facing the column. near Column E5. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Component. 45 Click OK. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. under Constraints. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight.38 On the Design Bar. 39 Select the sidewalk. as shown: (Element Properties). 44 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Sidewalk. enter -250 mm. for Type. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. for Height Offset from Level. select Rotate after placement. Next. a photorealistic image displays. 49 On the Options Bar. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. The completed sidewalk displays. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. In plan view. click Finish Sketch. When you render an image. click Duplicate. 48 In the Type Selector. select M_RPC Male : Alex. and on the Options Bar. click Edit/New. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. 42 In the Name dialog. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element.

and place it along the sidewalk behind him. 52 In the Type Selector.NOTE If necessary. 54 In the Type Selector. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. and click to place her on the sidewalk. click Camera. 56 Press ESC twice. click the car. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. select M_RPC Beetle. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. and click (Element Properties). and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. about 30 degrees. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex.

under 3D Views. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. enter -300 mm. 66 Using the same method. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. When you select a host for a component. 60 In the Project Browser. click Pick Host. 65 Click the sidewalk. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . If the sidewalk changes height. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. for Offset. double-click West. and click OK.59 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click To Building. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. and on the Options Bar. 63 Click the sidewalk. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. under Constraints. and on the Options Bar. Next. 64 Select Alex. click Pick Host. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car.

After the service core is positioned. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. and replace them with a service core.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

4 Press DELETE. double-click 05 Roof Garden. you delete the entire stairwell. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building.rvt. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. click 6 On the View toolbar. including the stairs. 3 Select the entire stairwell. 5 On the View toolbar. walls. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. and shaft opening. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. under Floor Plans. click (Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels). Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 .

and notice that the linked file is listed.rvt. 14 In the Project Browser. right-click m_RRB_core. and open Metric\m_RRB_core.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and zoom in to the linked instance. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. and click Create Instance. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. and on the Design Bar. click Modify. double-click 01 Entry Level. 11 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. expand Model. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. expand Groups. click (Align). 13 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. click OK.

20 On the View toolbar. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. click Modify.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. (SteeringWheels). 18 Select the core. and on the Options Bar. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. 17 On the Design Bar. and click to align the center. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. (Default 3D View). click 21 On the View toolbar. click Modify. ■ ■ Click grid line C. 19 On the Design Bar. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . click Ungroup. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. click (top down view). or if the group layout is expected to change.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise.rvt. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. After you modify it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. you add glass railings around the floor edges. 22 Proceed to the final exercise. click Training Files. where it is hosted within a railing family.

9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. click Edit. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. and on the Options Bar. The rendering displays. 8 In the Project Browser. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and open Metric\m_Conference. double-click 02 Level. Handrail only. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. press and hold CTRL. 13 On the Tools toolbar.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. The floor sketch displays. click OK. click Training Files. in the Project Browser. expand Renderings.rvt. expand Families. click (Split). 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. and click to split the floor. and Parapet. and select Glass. under Floor Plans. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . and expand Railings.rvt. 5 Expand Railing. 3 In the Conference project. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and double-click Lounge Perspective.

and click to draw another line. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew.15 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. click Modify. 25 Select grid line B. 18 On the Design Bar. click Lines. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. verify that Chain is not selected. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. click (Align). 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click to draw another line. 24 On the Tools toolbar. and click the lock to lock the alignment. and click to place it. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long.

click Railing Properties. click Dimension. select Glass. click (Align). 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 .26 Select grid line D. and lock the alignment. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D.rvt project. 27 On the Tools toolbar. 33 On the Design Bar. and click OK. For Offset. enter 100 mm. click Finish Sketch. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. for Type. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. Lock the dimensions. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. click Railing. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. 29 On the Design Bar. 30 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Revit dialog. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).

41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. click Dimension. 39 Click Finish Sketch.37 On the Design Bar. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera.

42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . You can view the railing that you just added.

43 Close all project drawings. 152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. 153 . and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. exterior fire stairs. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. slight modifications to the building design have been made. and a roof garden. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. We wish to thank BNIM Architects.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. NOTE For training purposes. lofty ceilings. balconies.

154 .

you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. section. including plan. you learn how to create views from a building model. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. how to create section and elevation views.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You learn how to create new views from existing views. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. 155 . and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. elevation.

rvt. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Floor Plans. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.

right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. 7 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 4 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. and click OK.2 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. under Floor Plans. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. 3 In the Rename View dialog. select Level 2. 8 In the Rename View dialog.

13 In the Project Browser. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. 12 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Vicinity Plan. and click 1: 1000. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. enter Vicinity Plan. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 14 On the View Control Bar. Next. under Floor Plans. 11 Under Floor Plans. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. click the current scale.

17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. 16 Right-click. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise.rvt. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.

Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Elevation. 3 In the Type Selector. for Scale. select Elevation: Building Elevation. select 1:100. double-click Level 1. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker.

click Modify.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 .

click Section. for Scale. 15 On the Options Bar.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1:100. 11 In the Project Browser. ■ Move the cursor down. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Section: Building Section. under Views (all). 14 In the Type Selector. enter South East. under Elevations. double-click South East. under Elevations (Building Elevation). expand Floor Plans. 10 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. and double-click Level 1. and click OK. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3.

18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 .

19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Click the midpoint of the section line. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. click Split Segment.

and double-click Section 1. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. 24 Select gridline F. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. using the blue circular drag grip. click Modify. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.21 On the Design Bar. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. 23 On the View Control Bar. expand Sections (Building Section).

Creating Callout Views In this exercise. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. To create each view. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view.25 On the Design Bar.

Resulting callout view . Creating Callout Views | 167 . select 1:50.rvt. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. click Callout. 3 In the Type Selector. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. select Floor Plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. 4 On the Options Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. for Scale. under Floor Plans.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. and select the callout boundary. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. click Modify. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. ■ Select the middle grip.

and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. Creating Callout Views | 169 . 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click Callout. under Sections (Building Sections). select Detail View: Detail. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. double-click Section 1. for Scale. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 9 In the Rename View dialog. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Type Selector.7 On the Design Bar. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. click Modify. 14 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1:50. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building.

16 Modify the callout leader as shown. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

expand Detail Views (Details). Creating Callout Views | 171 .17 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Detail Views (Details). and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. enter Roof Overhang Detail. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Rename View dialog.

select Custom-Section Head.rfa.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. click Training Files. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. under Floor Plans. open Metric\Families\Annotations. and click Open. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. the elevation markers. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click Level 1. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. You change the appearance of the section mark head.rvt.

18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. enter Section Head – Custom. 17 Under Category. 12 For Section Tag. and click OK. click Duplicate. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . scroll to Section Line. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. select Section Head . 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 19 Click OK. and select 3. Section Tail – Filled. 10 On the floor plan. 22 In the Name dialog. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. click Edit/New.Filled. click Duplicate. click the Annotation Objects tab. 15 Under Category. and click OK. . 7 In the Type Properties dialog. clear any others.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.Custom. select the current project. scroll to Section Marks. and click OK twice. click Load into Project. and click OK. and select 2. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. and click OK. enter 12. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. On the floor plan. select the section line. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. and can be applied to the section line. Section Tail . Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. for Section Head. 8 In the Name dialog. 4 On the Design Bar.5mm Square.

clear all others. Click OK. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. For Corner Radius. and on the Options Bar.23 In the Type Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. . select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. click Duplicate. enter 6 mm. 27 Click OK twice. and click Open. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. open Metric\Families\Annotations. for Elevation Tag. and click OK. 40 Press ESC. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. . select Square. click Edit/New. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog.rfa. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Load into Project. notice the square elevation markers that display. 34 In the Name dialog. On the floor plan.5 mm. 39 Click OK twice.5mm Square. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. For Line Weight. for Callout Tag. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. select Custom-Callout Head. and click OK. select 3. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. click Edit/New. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. select 12. 36 In the drawing. select the callout. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. select the current project. enter 12. 30 On the Design Bar. For Dimensions ➤ Width. Click OK. click Training Files.

42 In the Objects Styles dialog. You learn to create view templates. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. expand Callout Boundary. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. and select 4. 49 Click OK. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . filters. 46 Under Category. 43 Under Category. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 45 For Line Pattern. scroll down to Callout Boundary. view regions.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and select 7. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Dash. masking regions. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. and visual overrides. click the Annotation Objects tab.

you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Training Files. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. click (Hide Crop Region). 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. and features blue triangular grips and break marks.rvt.Creating a View Template In this exercise. and apply it to multiple elevation views. and double-click East. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. To accomplish this. 5 On the View Control Bar. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click (Show Crop Region). View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. click Zoom to Fit. The crop region displays as red. under Elevations. 6 On the View Toolbar.

under Visibility. Creating a View Template | 177 . 13 On the View Control bar. clear Entourage. Callouts. and section lines are now hidden in the view. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. 11 Under Visibility.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. levels. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. grids. elevation markers. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab.

18 In the Project Browser. right-click East. and click Create View Template From View. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.rvt. click OK. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. 15 In the New View Template dialog. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .14 In the Project Browser. right-click North. under Elevations. edit the crop region as before. under Elevations. 16 In the View Templates dialog. 17 In the Project Browser. click Apply. and click OK. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. 20 Using the same method. and click Apply View Template. double-click North.

double-click Penthouse. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . Click OK twice. Under View Depth. for Bottom. for Level. under Extents. and click Properties. for View Range. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. under Floor Plans. select Penthouse. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. click Edit. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. right-click. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. select Level Below (Level 4). select Level Below (Level 4).rvt. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. 2 In the Project Browser.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise.

and click Properties. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Level 4. select Level 4. Click OK twice.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. Under View Depth. select Roof Plan. double-click Roof Plan. under Extents. for View Range. click Edit. under Floor Plans. right-click. for Level. 6 In the Project Browser. for Bottom. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.

select Unlimited. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. Move you cursor diagonally. 13 On the Design Bar. under Extents. click Region Properties. for View Range. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . for Bottom.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Level. select Unlimited. 11 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. In the left corner of the building. Under View Depth. click Lines. click Plan Region. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. Click OK twice. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. 16 On the Design Bar. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). click Finish Sketch. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit.

rvt. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Views (all).17 On the Design Bar. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. in this case. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click the Filters tab. After you apply the filter. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. and double-click Level 1. click Modify. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. the fire rating of the walls. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. expand Floor Plans.

12 On the Filter tab. 7 In the Filters dialog.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Enter Hr. click (New). 14 In the Color dialog. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. click OK. 17 Using the same method. and click OK. under Filters. and click OK. 10 On the Filter tab. for Rated Walls. click Edit/New. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. for Pattern. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. select the red color. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. 9 Click OK. select Solid Fill. select Fire Rating. click Remove. under Basic colors. click Add. Select contains. under Categories. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. 16 Click OK. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. select Walls. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click Override under Patterns. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. enter Rated Walls. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. 11 Select Rated Walls. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . and click OK. and click OK. for Color. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. click <No Override>. and apply a color. under Projection/Surface. 5 In the Filters dialog.

Masking Portions of a View In this exercise.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. To accomplish this. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. as shown. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 4 On the View Control Bar. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Select the crop region. right-click. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Type Selector. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK.rvt. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. 5 On the View menu. 9 On the View Control Bar. select Invisible lines. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . and click Rename. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 7 On the View menu. click Masking Region. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. click Show Crop Region.

186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 On the Design Bar.12 On the Options Bar. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. click Finish Sketch. click (Rectangle).

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click in the Patterns field. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 11 Click OK twice. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise.rvt. under Pattern Overrides. 7 Under Cut. right-click. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . select Solid fill. under Visibility. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. for Pattern. 4 On the View Control Bar.Level 1. right-click Unit 18 Plan . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click OK. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click black. for Color. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. and click 1: 50. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. select Walls. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. click the current scale. and click Override. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. click <No Override> to apply a color. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. right-click.

Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. under Visibility.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. clear Floors. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . clear Grids. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 16 Under Visibility. and click OK. click Modify.

18 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 .

click Override. for Pattern. select Dash. click a purple color. for Color. click <No Override> to apply a color. 23 In the Color dialog. and click OK. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. 21 Under Projection/Surface. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element.20 Right-click. 25 Click OK twice. under Lines. right-click. By using the previous method to make the selection. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. select the sofa. click Projection Lines. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan.

and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. right-click. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. and click OK twice. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. 30 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 .28 For Color. 32 Select one of the lamps. click By Category Override. 29 In the Color dialog. click . select a bright green color.

Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. how to add views to the sheets. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. click . Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet.33 On the View Control Bar. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar.Creating Sheets. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats.rvt. right-click. and click OK. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click View. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . select A0 metric. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Sheet. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. click Training Files.

NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. expand Sheets (all). The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. 3 In the Project Browser. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. enter Site Plan. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 When the title block highlights. For Sheet Name.Unnamed. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. enter A101. on the Options Bar. and select the title block. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). 7 On the Design Bar. For Sheet Number. Click OK. click Modify. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block.

enter J. enter 15 May. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . MA 12345 12 Click OK. 14 Click OK. 2009. For Project Status. for Project Address. enter Freighthouse Flats. For Project Number. The new project information displays in the titleblock. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. enter 2009-1.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. under Other. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. Smith. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. For Project Name. enter For Approval. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. For Client Name. click Edit.

196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you add views to these sheets. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click OK. enter Floor Plan. 17 In the Project Browser.Elevations A106 . right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. right-click. select A0 metric. and click OK.Layout Plan A104 . select the new sheet name.Stairs In the following exercise. for Name.Sections A108 . Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. and click Save.Elevations A107 . Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. and click Rename.Elevations A105 .

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. click Modify. under Floor Plans. 6 In the Project Browser. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Sheets (all).Elevations. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . and drag it to the sheet. double-click A102 . Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. The red border around the view no longer displays. select Level 1. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet.rvt. and click to place the view. double-click A104 . 2 In the Project Browser.Floor Plan. under Elevations (Building Elevation). under Sheets (all).

drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. and click to place it. and click to place it. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). under Sheets (all). click Modify. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet.Sections. double-click A107 . 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. 8 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. align it with the East elevation. click Modify. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections).

Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. zoom in to the grip. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. and click OK. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Select title bar. .Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. and on the Options Bar. for View Scale. and press TAB until it highlights. move the cursor over it. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. select 1:5.

under Sheets (all). View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. 19 On the Design Bar. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. and click to place it. 18 Under Floor Plans.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. click Modify.Stairs. double-click A108 . 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

under Sheets (all).rvt. 5 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 2 Select the building section view. and click Activate View. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 .Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. you must first activate the view on the sheet. enter 16700 mm. and press ENTER. and then make changes and deactivate the view. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. right-click. double-click A107 . you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. click Modify. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level.Sections. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. In order to do this.

as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. 7 In the Project Browser. you create a title sheet for your drawing set.rvt. double-click North. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Elevations (Building Elevation).6 Right-click. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Deactivate View. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. After you create the sheet. You modify the view to hide the view title.

right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . and click OK. and click Properties. click Camera. right-click. 3 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The camera view displays. 7 Place the camera as shown. For Sheet Name. select A0 metric. enter Title Sheet. under Floor Plans. select the new sheet name. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. enter T. Click OK.

enter 18000 mm. for Eye Elevation. Click OK. Under Camera. For Far Clip Offset.Title Sheet. double-click T . For Target Elevation. select Far Clip Active. 12 On the View Control Bar. and click to place it in the center of the sheet.8 On the Options Bar. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. enter 1500 mm. under Sheets (all). Under Extents. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . enter 100000 mm. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. 11 On the View Control Bar. 13 In the Project Browser. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 14 Under 3D Views. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on.

17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. Click Apply. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. click Modify. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. under Graphics. click Edit/New. select No. and on the Options Bar.15 With the view selected. click Duplicate. click Size. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 635 mm. . select Scale (locked proportions). 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. 25 On the Design Bar. enter Viewport/no title mark. and then click OK. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. for Height. 19 Select the view on the sheet. on the Options Bar. and click OK. click Modify. 24 Click OK twice. for Show title. 22 In the Name dialog. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . Under Model Crop Size.

and close the exercise file. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. such as room and window schedules.Level 1. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. 207 .rvt. Because of the open style floor plan. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. You also learn to create different types of schedules. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. Tagging Objects In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. click Training Files. such as doors and windows.

click Room Separation. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). as shown: 5 Using the same method. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. move the cursor to the right. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click Room and Area. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active.

7 On the Design Bar.6 Using the same method. click Modify. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . 9 In the Tags dialog. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. click Load.

The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. 14 For Offset. and press ENTER. and the rectangle contains the room tag. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. and select the room tag. click OK.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 11 In the Tags dialog. indicating that it can be edited. click it. type U18-1. type 2400 mm. The room tag number displays in blue. click Training Files. verify that Tag on placement is selected. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. and click to place the room and tag. 13 On the Options Bar. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.rfa. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. click Room. click Modify. 16 On the Design Bar. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

click Room. Dining. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . and edit the tags as shown (Toilet.18 Click the room text label. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. Sequential letters are also supported. type Kitchen. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. click Modify. Click to place the new room and tag. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. place rooms and tags. and press ENTER. 19 On the Design Bar. type Entry. and press ENTER. 22 Click the room text label. click Modify. 23 Using the same method.

expand Lines. on the Model Categories tab. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar. click Room Tag.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and moving clockwise. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . The rooms are already placed. click Modify. but they need to be tagged. double-click Unit 18 Plan . under Floor Plans. clear Room Separation.Level 2. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. 29 On the Design Bar. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair).

you learn how to place door and window tags. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. in the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans.Level 1.rvt.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 3 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . click Tag ➤ By Category. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary.rvt.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

for room 101. For 105. add 5 more rooms. click New. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . The room Number is U17-46. for Name. type Corridor. select Storage. For 102. select Corridor. type Storage. For 104. 101-106. 11 Using the same method. and press ENTER. 10 Edit the number to be 101. type Building Entry. next to Rows. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. For 103. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule.

2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand Lines. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select 9. under Floor Plans. and modify room names. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Visibility. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. and press ENTER. double-click Level 1. click the Color field. For Room Separation.rvt. 13 Save the file. For Weight. you add room separation lines. click Override. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . type Stair. 4 Click OK twice. click the Lines field. and click OK. click the bright green swatch. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. In the Lines field. under Projection/Surface. Under Custom colors.■ For 106. place rooms from a program list. In the Line Graphics dialog.

draw the horizontal line. 9 On the Design Bar. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. click Room Separation.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. click Room. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. First. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . click Modify. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing.

11 On the Options Bar. select 101 Building Entry. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 13 On the Options Bar.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. type 2400 mm. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). for Room. select 102 Storage. 14 For Offset. for Room.

16 Using the same method. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. 20 While pressing CTRL. place the following rooms. click Modify. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). under Schedules/Quantities. 17 On the Design Bar. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. double-click Level 1. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . double-click Room Schedule.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. under Floor Plans. and zoom in to the Corridor. 19 In the Project Browser.

click New. 31 For Key Name. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and Wall Finish. Floor Finish. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. and click Add. clear Room Bounding. under Constraints. for Rows. under Available fields.21 On the Options Bar. type Units. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. and click OK. 24 Open the Room Schedule. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. 27 Select Schedule keys. and for all 3 finishes. click 23 On the Design Bar. select Base Finish. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. click Modify. while pressing CTRL. click Schedule/Quantities. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Category. type As Selected. select Rooms. (Element Properties). 30 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. for Room Style. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. right-click Room Schedule. for Fields. 42 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. select Units. for Available fields. click (Element Properties). 43 In the Filter dialog. select Units.32 Using the same method. double-click Level 1. select Room Style. and click OK. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. under Schedules/Quantities. click (Filter Selection). 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. 37 Open the Room Schedule. and click Add. click Edit. 38 Under U17-8. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. 36 Click OK twice. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. select Rooms. 44 On the Options Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . under Other. click Check None. 33 In the Project Browser. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. under Identity Data. for Room Style. and click Properties.

10 In the Element Properties dialog. type Room Type. and double-click Level 1. click OK. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). and click Properties.rvt. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. For rooms 102 and 105. click the Color Scheme field. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and apply it to the Level 1 view.46 Open the Room Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. expand Floor Plans. right-click Level 1. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Name. under Views (all). m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. select Room Style. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Public. and 106. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. (Duplicate). at the warning prompt. 48 Save the file. 103. 9 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 104. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. and click OK. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Graphics. click OK. select Service. click 5 For Title. for Color. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. type Room Type.

and click OK. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. under Schemes. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). 12 In the Element Properties dialog. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. click Color Scheme Legend. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. clear Visible. select Room Type. expand Lines. click Edit Color Scheme. 19 On the Options Bar. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. select the color legend. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click the value in the Color column.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . click Edit. under Visibility. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). 17 On the Design Bar. 14 Click OK twice. and clear Room Separation.

under Graphics. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. for Swatch Width. under Custom color.22 In the Color dialog. click Modify. 30 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 24 Click OK. on the Options Bar. type 5 mm. 23 Using the same method. 29 Click OK twice. respectively. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. type 25 mm. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Edit/New. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. select blue. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. for Size. 28 Under Title Text. (Element Properties).

37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . As you move the cursor over the drawing area. select Rooms. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. under Sections. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. double-click Building Section. and click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Color Scheme Legend. under Visibility. under Sections. for Color Scheme. click Edit. right-click Building Section. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. 35 Click OK twice. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. under Graphics. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. and select Properties. select Room Type.

click . click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. select Units. select all the rooms in the stairwell. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 In the Filter dialog. 45 While pressing CTRL. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Identity Data. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. for Room Style. under Identity Data. and click OK. and click OK.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. select Rooms. for Room Style. select Public. and click OK. 46 Click . click Check None. (Filter Selection). 41 On the Options Bar.

for Room Style. 54 While pressing CTRL. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. select Service. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. for Rows. under Key Name for the new row. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. and click . Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. and click OK. excluding the stairwell spaces.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. click New. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. under Identity Data. double-click Room Style Schedule. type Suites. 51 On the Options Bar. under Schedules/Quantities.

select Suites. verify that At wall finish is selected. select Areas and Volumes. select the room on the left side of the top floor. 59 Under Room Area Computation. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. and click OK. The color fill extends to the roof. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 56 In the Element Properties dialog.55 Click . but not beyond it. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. under Volume Computations. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. and click OK. for Room Style. under Identity Data. The color fill will extend to the roof. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog.

for Upper Limit. under Constraints. type 0. 67 On the first level. 71 Click OK. select Level 2. and the living room.0. the dining room. under Constraints. select Loft. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). 70 For Limit Offset. 68 Click . 66 Click OK. and click 65 For Limit Offset. select the stairwell room. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . 72 On the Design Bar. for Upper Limit. . type -254 mm. 64 In the Element Properties dialog.

73 Save the file. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. double-click {3D}. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. under 3D Views.

select Roofs.EPDM. 4 In the Type Selector. and click Add. 3 While pressing CTRL. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . 9 Using the same method. For Then by. select Material: Description. 5 On the Design Bar. click Family and Type. Select Grand totals. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. and click OK. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields.Insulation on Plywood Deck . under Category. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. click Modify. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. Clear Itemize every instance. select Family and Type. under Available fields. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff.

The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays.40 50. for Name. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. for Material: Cost. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. Under Field formatting. click Edit. and under Fields. type Estimated Cost. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select Material: Area. 23 For Field formatting. 20 For Formula. and click Properties. click Estimated Cost. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. select Material: Cost.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Currency. 17 Click Calculated Value. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. for Fields. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 21 Click OK. under Available fields. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. and click Add. 12 Click OK. under Other. click the Formatting tab. select Calculate totals. select Calculate totals. 19 For Type. and click OK twice.

for Rounding. 26 In the Project Units dialog. ensuring consistency across families and projects. These shared parameters can be added to any family. You draw a travel path line.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. select $. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. In this lesson. you create an exiting plan for the building. adding the shared parameters to a family. Digit grouping. and reporting the shared parameters. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. can be used for any number-based parameter. tag the line. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. 30 Click OK twice. click the Format value. not just for currency. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. creating a generic tag to tag the family. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. regardless of category. 27 In the Format dialog. and are defined and stored in an external file. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. which inserts commas after every three digits.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. and schedule the total distance of each path. either within family components or within the project template. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. 28 For Unit symbol. The cost fields are formatted correctly. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . 31 Save the file. you create a shared parameter file. for Currency. 29 Select Use digit grouping.

12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Length. and click OK. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. for Type of Parameter. click Create.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. type OfficeStandardsParameters. 7 Under Parameters. click Training Files. click Training Files.rvt. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. type Travel Distance. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. under Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. for File name.txt. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. click New. click New. type Exiting. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. for Name. type Path ID. 9 Under Parameters.rvt. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. for Name. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. for Name. and click Save. under Groups. 11 Click OK twice. click New. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog.

under Parameters. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. under Parameter Type. 8 Select Instance. and click Select. 11 Click OK. otherwise the family loads into the current project. under Parameter Data. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. click Load into Projects. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. for Travel Distance Formula. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. and select Instance. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 12 In the Family Types dialog. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. click Add. select Constraints. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Click Training Files. and click OK. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog. under Dimensions. click Family Types. under Parameters. 13 Click Apply. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. 3 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 10 Using the same method. following the equals symbol (=). select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. type Length. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 9 In the Family Types dialog. 15 If necessary. group it under Dimensions. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. select Shared parameter. click Add.rvt. for Group parameter under. If you have multiple projects open. in the Load into Projects dialog. 14 On the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress.rfa. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 .Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise.rvt.

select Travel Distance.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. under Category Parameters. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. and click OK. 24 Click OK twice. click Select. 19 On the Design Bar. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. (Add 26 On the Design Bar.rft. click Training Files. click Label. under Parameters. click Label. click parameter(s) to label). 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Travel Distance. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click (Add Parameter).

select Path ID. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. and press DELETE.rvt is selected. type M_Travel Distance Tag. 33 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Load into Projects. and move it down. for File Name. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance.rfa. and click Save. 32 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 . 29 In the drawing window. 35 Save the file.28 On the Design Bar. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress.

select Chain.Placing. 4 On the Options Bar. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. and click in the center of the corridor. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress.Tagging. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. double-click Exiting Plan . 6 Move the cursor to the right. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. above the exterior door as shown. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown.Level 1. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. After the lines are tagged. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. click Component.

18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. under Constraints. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. and click (Element Properties). click Tag ➤ By Category. clear Leader.7 Move the cursor down. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . under Floor Plans. and click OK. 17 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 13 While pressing CTRL. and click outside of the building. verify that Chain is selected. click Component. 8 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. double click Exiting Plan . Placing.Level 2. select the 2 dashed travel lines. for Path ID. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor near the right corner. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. click Modify. type 1-1. click Modify.Tagging. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. through the door.

click Component. 20 On the Design Bar. and click in the stair. and click above the door to the stair. 21 On the Design Bar. 23 Move the cursor down. click Modify. move the cursor to the left. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click.19 Move the cursor up through the door.

28 While pressing CTRL.24 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 30 Using the same method. type Level 1 Exit Distance. . Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. type 2-1. for Path ID. click Modify. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. Placing. 33 For Name. under Category. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. 26 Select each of the travel path lines.Tagging. under Constraints. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. click Modify. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path.

under Schedules/Quantities. select Travel Distance. click Training Files. and click Rename. in the first field. 49 Click OK twice. type 1-. select Calculate totals. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. while pressing CTRL. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 45 In the Rename View dialog. click Edit. 35 Click the Filter tab. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. 38 For Sort by. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. 36 For Filter by. and click Add. 40 Click the Formatting tab. type 2-. 50 Save the file.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. in the third field. select Path ID. under Available fields. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. for Filter. 46 In the Project Browser. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Filter by. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 41 Under Fields. and under Field formatting. select contains. and click OK. 44 In the Project Browser. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. under Other. 43 In the Project Browser. select Path ID. select Path ID and Travel Distance. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. 42 Click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. type Level 2 Exit Distance. and click Properties.rvt. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. in the second field. and in the third field.

and click Properties.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. click Schedule/Quantities. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. for Assembly Code. 4 Under Available fields. select the following fields.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. click the Value field. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 . click the Fields tab.Interiors ➤ C10 . 9 Click OK twice. expand C .Partitions . 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. right-click Generic . 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. right-click the Design Bar. and select C1010145 .Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . 10 In the schedule. under Identity Data. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. select Walls. and click . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. and click View.152 mm. under Categories. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.Fixed Partitions.

8 In the New Database dialog. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. and click Next. for Database Name. click Create. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. click Training Files. under Database. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. 3 Click New. 9 Under Directories.mdb). click OK. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. and click Next.mdb. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog.rvt. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK to create the database. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select a location for the database file. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. 11 Click OK 3 times. click the File Data Source tab. 6 Click Finish.11 Close the exercise file. type Revit_Project. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. the database display may be different than that shown. 1 On the File menu.

Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. 13 Close the exercise file. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. Additionally. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. in addition to the Id column. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. For example.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types.

262 .

you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. 263 . Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. you trace over the building model geometry. plywood. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. These components display at the required scale. 297 .Detailing 7 In this tutorial. add detail components. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. In the callout view. and metal studs. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. In order to detail from the building model. like a standard door header condition. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009.

rvt. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Yes to load a Detail Items family. click Training Files. and click OK. They are also view specific. click Detail Component. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. region objects. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.rfa. double-click the detail callout head. and insulation objects. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. as well as detail lines. click Training Files. which means that all detail components. After you add components. Exact location is not important. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the alert dialog. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component.Detailing the View In this exercise. you detail the view of the roof edge. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. select As underlay. and click Open. The roof overhang detail displays. You load detail components. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

11 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). click Modify. enter 406. 13 In the Name dialog. enter Corrugated Metal Siding.8 Delete the component. 19 On the Design Bar. Detailing the View | 299 . Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents.5mm. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 17 In the drawing area. select Corrugated Metal. 15 For Spacing. 10 On the Options Bar. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. 16 Click OK twice. for Pattern ➤ Detail. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. click Repeating Detail. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail.

300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Component. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. click Load. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. 22 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ Click Modify.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. and on the Edit toolbar. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar.rfa. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. 24 In the Type Selector. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. click (Move). and click Open. click Training Files.

select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal.Because you still have several components to load. and click Open. and place it in the detail view as shown. click Training Files. 29 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. press SPACEBAR 3 times. 31 To properly orient the component. click Detail Component. 33 In the Type Selector. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point.rvt. click OK. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. Detailing the View | 301 . 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 30 In the Type Selector. you load them as a group from a single file.

select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. click the Flip instance arrows. 37 Click Modify. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. select Chain. 35 On the Options Bar. and click Modify. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 36 Place the wallboard component as shown.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. 38 Select the horizontal segment.

select to near side.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. enter 140mm. click (Move). Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. 42 Click Modify. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. click Detail Component. and on the Edit toolbar. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. Detailing the View | 303 . For Offset. as shown. click Insulation. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. ■ Click Modify.

meaning they display only in this view. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. 47 In the Type Selector. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. 51 Click Modify. Like detail components. they are view specific. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. you add lines to your detail. and lock the component. click Detail Lines. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. select Thin Lines. as shown. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. 2 In the Type Selector. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.45 In the Type Selector. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. 52 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm.

drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. and press ENTER. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. enter 10mm. 7 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. select Medium Lines. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. 11 In the Type Selector. as shown. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Lines. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. as shown. click Detail Lines. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). For Offset. enter 10mm. For Offset. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar.4 Click Modify. select Thin Lines.

Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. and clear Chain. 16 On the Options Bar. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. click (Draw). 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . as shown. select Chain. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. and draw the detail lines as shown.

click Detail Lines. and click Properties. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. select the Penthouse level line. select Do not display. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. enter 10mm. draw the detail lines as shown. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. and press ENTER. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. 24 On the View Control Bar. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. 22 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Click (Pick Lines). When you turn the display model off. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. select Vapor Barrier. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. 26 In the Type Selector.18 In the Type Selector. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). right-click. select Thin Lines. For Offset.

29 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. Adding Text Notes on page 308. 32 Click Modify. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. you add text notes to complete the detail. select M_Break Line. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. press SPACEBAR as necessary. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. 30 In the Type Selector. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader.rvt. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. Adding Text Notes | 309 . click Dimension.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 Click Modify. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. 2 On the Options Bar. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. and click to place the dimension. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. Enter the text. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click again to specify the location of the text box. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. click Text.

under Text Fields. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. and click OK. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. and save the exercise file. (Filter Selection). and click Rename. Creating Detail Components on page 310. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 3 In the Rename View dialog. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area.Keynotes. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. and click OK.rvt. for Suffix. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. right-click. enter Roof Overhang Detail . 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click the dimension text.7 Select the dimension line. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. click 6 In the Filter dialog. and press DELETE. click Select All Instances. click Roof Overhang Detail. enter Typ. right-click. on the Options Bar. right-click. select a text note. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

16 Click Modify. Creating Detail Components | 311 . pressing TAB. in the Type Selector. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and selecting the chain. 15 Use a window to select all linework. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component.rft. select all the coping linework. while pressing CTRL. and click Open. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework.7 Click Modify. click Training Files. select Medium Lines. 14 Click Modify. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog.

NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . click Load into Projects. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. click Detail Component. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Training Files. 23 Using a window. you place keynotes on objects. for File name. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. 22 Click Modify. and click Open. select the coping. and click OK. The original linework remains selected. 30 In the drawing area. click Detail Component. clear Detail Items. delete the underlying linework. click .Keynotes view is not the open view. navigate to your preferred location. While pressing SHIFT. and the component can be placed in the detail. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. 25 In the Filter dialog. Adding Keynotes on page 312.18 In the Save As dialog. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Save. 26 Press DELETE. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 21 To place the component. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. 28 On the Options Bar. enter Roof Edge. 31 Using the same method used previously. click Load. 27 On the Design Bar. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.rfa. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. 24 On the Options Bar. double-click it in the Project Browser.

select the metal fascia with drip edge. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. and click Open. Click to place the leader arm. click Edit/New.B5. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. click Training Files.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. Adding Keynotes | 313 . 2 In the alert dialog.D11. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.rvt. use keynote 07645. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. (Element Properties).rfa. In the Keynotes dialog. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. For the metal coping. 6 Click Modify. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. Roof Edge4. use keynote 06160.C1. 19mm Plywood. click Keynote ➤ Element. 63mm Rigid Insulation.

you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. use keynote 06160.A8. 22mm Corrugated Steel . 15 In the Type Selector. 17 Keynote the component. click Keynote ➤ Element. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag.D1. use keynote 06110. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar.F1. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. navigate to 07645. select Corrugated Metal. FasciaProfile_1. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. use keynote 06110. 11 Click OK 3 times. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. For the 50 x 300. and click . click Detail Component. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. For the 50 x 200. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.G1. For the 50 x 150. click in the Value column. 18 Save the file. 12 On the Design Bar. using keynote 07460. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.9 In the Type Properties dialog.F1. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted.I1. use keynote 09250. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. You do this in order to keynote the component.20 Ga. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing .D11. use keynote 06110.

5 In the drawing area. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. navigate to your preferred location. click Load. 15 Click Modify.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 Lock the line. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click Open. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component.rft. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. click Duplicate. 22 On the Options Bar. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 8 In the Save As dialog. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Edit/New. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. select Medium Line Detail Component. select the left end point of the reference line. and select the right end point. click Training Files. and click Save. and m_Light Line Detail Component. click Load into Projects. 4 In the Type Selector. and click Open. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 13 In the Type Selector. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. for File name. and click Modify. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. 19 In the Name dialog. and click (Element Properties). 9 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. 11 Press DELETE. 24 While pressing CTRL. click Lines. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Click OK 3 times. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. click Detail Component. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. click Detail Component. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 16 Select the component. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt.

click Detail Component. enter EPDM Membrane. 37 Click OK 3 times. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 34 In the Name dialog. click (Move). 40 Click Modify. and click the lower end at the break line. 27 On the Design Bar. against the 19mm plywood. invisible. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and assign it keynote 06110. and hidden) used in the view. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 38 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 30 Click Modify. and click .G1. and click OK. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530.A5. click Duplicate. 46 Click Modify. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 48 Using the same method used previously. name the component Air Barrier. and click . and assign it keynote 07260. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 44 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. and click . 35 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value column. 31 Select the component. 42 Using the same method used previously. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. 47 Select the component. and click . click Edit/New.25 Next. select m_Light Line Detail Component. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 In the drawing area. on the Edit toolbar. 41 Select the component just added. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 49 With the component selected. 28 In the Type Selector.A1. 36 In the Keynotes dialog.

click Detail Component. and click . select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 53 On the Options Bar. leaving the detail component lines. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 55 Click Modify. 52 In the Type Selector. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 . select Chain.

58 Using the method used previously. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. name the component Vapor Barrier. and assign it keynote 07260. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents.A4. 61 In the drawing area. 67 In the Type Selector. 60 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select the component. Air Barrier. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 63 In the drawing area. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. 50 x 200 Framing.rfa. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. click Load into Projects.rfa. click Keynote ➤ Element. and Vapor Barrier. select Invisible Lines. 68 In the drawing area. in the Type Selector.

click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise.A9. click File menu ➤ Save. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. Enter 07460. name the component Batt Insul. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. and press TAB.txt.A4. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. 70 Using the method used previously. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. 3 In the text editor. add a keynote for the component. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. 72 Save the file.69 Select the component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.. click Browse. and press ENTER. and assign it keynote 07210. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. The database file opens in a text editor.A1.rvt. and close the text editor. and press TAB. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Enter 07463. and click . Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. 71 In the drawing area. under Keynote Table.

After you create a drafting view. under Path Type. and click to place the note. select all the keynotes. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. 11 Click Modify. Each keynote displays as a simple number. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. 14 Save the file. These details do not update with changes to the building model. 9 In the drawing area. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. and click OK. you learn how to create a drafted detail. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number.A1.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. and click Open. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. 13 Click Modify. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. click to place the leader. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson.txt. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. In the Type Selector. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. and click OK. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). navigate to 07463. click Keynote ➤ Element. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. select Absolute.

enter EPDM Metal Coping. and click Rename. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. For Colors. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. verify that Auto . click Training Files. Click Open. right-click Drafting 1. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. select 1 : 5. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 6 In the Project Browser. For Positioning. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Center to Center is selected.rvt. and click OK. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. for Scale. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. The detail that you import is in DWG format. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. and click OK. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. 7 In the Rename View dialog. The detail is imported as an import symbol. select Black and White.rvt.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise.dwg.

double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar.No Reference. and click Properties. and click OK. 12 Click OK twice. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 10 In the Rename dialog. select Reference other view. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 5 Click Modify. click Callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . delete the existing value. click Rename. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 6 Select the callout. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. enter Detail . 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. for New. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog.

The callout is updated with the sheet information. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays.No Reference). so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. 19 Proceed to the next exercise./Det. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all).Elev.Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. double-click A105 ./Sect. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 . drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. and double-click the callout. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. 18 Save the file. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail.

and click OK. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. . click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog.rvt. enter Header @ Sliding Door.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. for Name. click Filled Region. 14 Click OK 3 times. click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Selector. 3 On the View Control Bar. 11 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. for Name. select Gypsum-Plaster. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Region Properties. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. and click OK. Board. enter Gyp. click Detail Component.

click Finish Sketch. select the left and bottom edges of the region. click (Draw). Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. Draw a rectangle as shown. and on the Edit toolbar. 18 While pressing CTRL. select Wide Lines. 20 On the Design Bar. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. and enter 20. 16 Select the left edge of the region. (Mirror).5mm. click . 17 Click Modify. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . select the width dimension.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click 22 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Type Selector.

click Region Properties. Move the cursor up. 33 Click OK 3 times. 24 Select the mirrored region.Finish.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. for Name. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Filled Region. select Wood . 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Edit/New. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Wood . 28 In the Element Properties dialog. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog.Finish. . and click above the top of the region as the end point. 25 Click Modify. click Duplicate. 30 In the Name dialog.

verify that the thickness is 19mm. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. click Finish Sketch. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. and select the right edge of the wood region. select Medium Lines. click . click (Align).34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. 39 In the Type Selector. 40 On the Options Bar. select Medium Lines.5mm. 37 On the Design Bar. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. 38 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . sketch the new region as shown. Draw a rectangle as shown. click (Rectangle). Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. click Filled Region. in the Type Selector.

328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. click 48 Click Modify. enter 10mm. 47 Click the reference plane. 46 On the Tools toolbar. click Ref Plane. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar.42 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and press ENTER. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). For Offset. For Offset. and press ENTER. enter 6mm. (Align). click Filled Region. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and click the bottom of the gypsum board region.

and click to select the point. Move the cursor left 25mm. 54 On the Tools toolbar.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . enter 0. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. click (Trim/Extend). For Offset. Move the cursor down 305mm. click Finish Sketch. and select the bottom horizontal line. Select Chain. and click to select the point. and click to select the point. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. Move the cursor right 25mm. 56 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER.

select the height dimension. click Detail Component. click Training Files. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. For Offset. 65 On the Options Bar. and click Open. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. 68 Click Modify. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 60 Select the left. select Medium Lines.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar.rfa. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. and right edges of the door panel region. 58 In the Type Selector. 69 Select the bolt.2mm. enter 3mm. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. and press ENTER. top. enter 76. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. click Load. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. 61 Click Modify. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 62 Select the left detail line. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. click Detail Component. use the images as a guide. click Load. click Training Files. and click Open. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. 76 In the Type Selector. select Wide Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 74 Select the expansion bolt.70 On the Design Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. click Detail Lines. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar.rfa. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. 71 On the Options Bar. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150.

click . 85 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 80 On the Options Bar. 79 In the Type Selector. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. click Detail Lines. 87 Click Modify. select Thin Lines.78 On the Design Bar. click . and on the Edit toolbar. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 84 On the Design Bar. 82 Select the rectangle. (Mirror).

92 Select the line. click Detail Lines. select Medium Lines.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. and on the Edit toolbar. click (Mirror). as shown. 90 In the Type Selector. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 89 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection.

96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 99 Click Modify. select the length dimension. enter 3mm.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. 103 Add two break lines as shown. 97 On the Options Bar. 95 On the Design Bar. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. select M_Break Line. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Lines. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. 102 In the Type Selector. 101 On the Design Bar. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. click . click Detail Component. and press ENTER. and click to place the arc as shown.

110 Select the dimension line.5mm Arial. click Dimension. using the Drag Text grip. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. 106 Click to place the dimension. 107 On the Design Bar. and click Modify. drag the text for the smaller dimension. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 108 In the Type Selector. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . click Dimension. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. 105 In the drawing area. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. and click Modify.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar.

and then click the dimension text. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. 113 Under Text Fields. enter See Schedule. and enter Varies.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. 118 Select Modify to end the command. 114 Click OK.5mmArial. click Dimension. for Below. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 112 In the Dimension Text dialog.2. select Replace With Text. under Dimension Value. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. under Dimension Value. select Replace With Text. and click the dimension text.

Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. and click to place the text. and click Modify. 128 Select the note. select the gypsum board region on the left. and on the Options Bar. 126 In the drawing area. click Text. Enter 225 mm @ Type C. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. 123 Click OK. 127 Enter Gyp. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. 125 In the Options Bar.121 Click OK. click to create an arced leader. click (Add Right Arc Leader). Board.

click Modify to end the command.131 On the Design Bar. 132 Save the file. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

Creating a Note Block In this exercise. 339 .rvt. click Training Files. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. and double-click East. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser.

7 On the Design Bar. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify. type 1. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . 5 On the Options Bar.rfa.Hexagon. for Number of Leaders. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. click Symbol. click Training Files. 8 Select the keynote.

9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. Creating a Note Block | 341 . under Identity Data. and click OK. click (Element Properties). 13 Select the tag. and click above the tag to place the copy. click (Copy). 11 In the Element Properties dialog. for Text. type Seal existing doors and insulate. on the Options Bar. 12 On the Edit toolbar.

type B. 19 With the tag selected. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. on the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). click Copy. 16 For Tag. on the Edit toolbar. 17 Click OK. and on the Options Bar.14 With the copy selected. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . (Mirror). 18 Using the same method. type Repair existing door surround. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. 15 For Text. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. and click.

Repair as required. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Tuckpoint as required. Clean existing concrete loading dock. using the table as a reference. Remove all existing windows. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Clean exterior brick wall. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. click Modify. 22 Optionally.21 On the Design Bar. and moving counter-clockwise. Repair existing door surround.

28 In the Project Browser. select Tag. select Tag. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. and click Add. for Header text. and click Add. type Mark. expand Schedules/Quantities. select Exterior Construction Notes.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. for Sort by. and for Alignment. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. and click OK. 27 In the column header (text). type 6 mm. for Note block name. for the value. Select Text. expand Sheets (all). verify that Arial is selected. select Center. and drag it to the sheet. Clean cut and repair wall as required. type Description. 29 In the Project Browser. format. On the Formatting tab. and select Bold. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. 26 Click OK. and double-click A103 . and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text.Elevations. Create. for Heading. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. under Available fields. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . On the Appearance tab. type Exterior Construction Notes.

32 Zoom in to see the note block. 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. double-click T . 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Using Drawing Lists | 345 . Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. under Sheets (all). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Title Sheet. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Modify. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project.31 On the Design Bar.

in the second field. and click Add. in the first field. and click Add. select Sheet Number. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. expand Schedules/Quantities.Title Sheet. On the Filter tab. type T. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. double-click T .2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. for Filter by. 6 In the Project Browser. and in the third field. under Sheets (all). select Sheet Index. select does not equal. ■ 4 Click OK. 7 In the Project Browser. select Sheet Number. for Sort by. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. The drawing list displays. Select Sheet Name. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . under Available fields. select Sheet Number. 5 In the list title field. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and drag it to the sheet.

Finally. On construction documents.9 On the Design Bar. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. windows. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. doors. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. On construction documents. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. For the text. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. 11 Save the file. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. door frame schedule. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. click Modify. and so on). Training File Using Legends | 347 . Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. and door frames.

8 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. type Typical Symbol Legend. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Symbol. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. and click OK twice.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . 9 For Text Font.Open Level Head . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . select Arial. 6 On the Options Bar. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. click Text. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click OK. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. you create a text type with the necessary size. 10 For Text Size. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector.rvt.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. type 3mm. for Name. and click OK. for Name. click . click Edit/New. type Legend Text. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties.

13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. 16 In the Project Browser. verify that is selected. and double-click A101 . Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 . 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. 14 Working from the top down. click Typical Symbol Legend.Site Plan/Floor Plan. expand Legends. expand Sheets (all). and for Leader. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. and click to place it.

21 In the Type Selector. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. and click to place it.Unit 18. 23 Save the file.17 In the Type Selector. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. double-click A102 . 19 In the Project Browser. under Sheets. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 18 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. click Modify. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify.

type 900 mm. For View.rvt. select Medium for Detail Level. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 For Scale. select Section. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . for Name. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. click Legend Component. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. select 1 : 50. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. For Host length. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and press ENTER. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 5 On the View Control Bar. type 4th Floor Wall Types. and click OK.

click Text. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. 12 In the Type Selector. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. click Modify. for Leader.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. click to add text without a leader. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. and on the Options Bar.9 On the Design Bar. 10 Select the second wall. 13 On the Options Bar. for Family. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

right-click Sheets (all).Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. 19 Type the following text. 23 In the Project Browser. and click New Sheet. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. The text note with leader is added to the legend. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and drag it to the new sheet. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . under Floor Plans. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. select Level 4. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. click to add text with a single-segment leader. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking.

double-click Level 4. click Modify to end the command. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 26 On the Design Bar. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. drag it onto the sheet. select 4th Floor Wall Types. under Legends. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. The open drawings are both visible. under Floor Plans. 29 In the Project Browser. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing.25 In the Project Browser.

select the Wall Type 2 component. click (Match Type). select Detail Level: Medium. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. Creating a Component Legend | 355 .Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. 35 On the View Control Bar. 34 Select the patio divider wall. 33 In the floor plan view. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component.

36 Optionally. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. contractor inquiries. Using the table. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. or changes in building material availability. click 37 Save the file. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project.rvt. double-click Level 4. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. In this exercise. These changes can be due to owner requests. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. You can create a sequence of revisions. under Floor Plans.

If Visible is not selected. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. 7 Under Show. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. if the active revision is number 1. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. If you select Per Sheet. In most instances. In general. For example. type a date. yet as concise as possible. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. for Numbering. the revision is locked and issued to the field. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. 5 For Description. verify that Per Project is selected. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. When you use this option. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. When Issued is selected. revision descriptions should be comprehensive.

2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. double-click Level 4. move the cursor up.rvt. 3 Select the divider. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. click Modify. 9 Save the file. you make changes to the project floor plan. under Floor Plans. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. including revision number and revision date. 4 On the Edit toolbar. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Select the divider. click (Move). but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. Revision clouds have read-only properties. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.8 Click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser.

click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the drawing area. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. click near the partition you moved. click Finish Sketch. 11 On the Design Bar. select Snaps Off. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. click Revision Cloud. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. In the Snaps dialog. and click OK.

13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. you load a revision tag into the project. for Line Weight. 16 Click OK. 17 Save the file.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. select 6. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click the Annotation Objects tab. 14 In the Object Styles dialog.

double-click Level 4.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. you need to add one. 12 Save the file. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click OK. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 5 In the Tags dialog. If the cursor is just inside the cloud.rvt. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. click Tag ➤ By Category. You then issue a revision. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. under Floor Plans. scroll down to Revision Clouds. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. click Training Files. 8 In the Tags dialog. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa. Working with Revisions In this exercise. and because the revision is the first in the project. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. click Tags. 11 Click to place the tag. 6 Click Load. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. the cloud is tagged as number 1. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . 10 In the drawing area. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. select Leader. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. 4 On the Options Bar. Because you chose to number by project.

and enter a date for the revision. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. 9 Click OK. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. NOTE After you issue a revision. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. you can no longer modify it. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. you prevent further changes to the revision. select Issued. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . You can continue to add revisions. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. You do this by issuing the revision. double-click A107 . under Sheets. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. with the description Relocate Door. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. type Modify Paving Area.rvt. and click OK. 8 Add another revision row. and enter a date. 7 For Description. click Add.Unnamed.

16 Add another revision cloud as shown. select Seq. under Floor Plans. 19 To add tags.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. 20 On the Project Browser. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. double-click A107 . 11 On the Drafting tab. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. under Sheets (all). select Tag ➤ By Category. Working with Revisions | 363 . 13 Click Finish Sketch. select the revision cloud. 2 .Unnamed. double-click Level 4.Modify Paving Area. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. in the drawing area. 3 . 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. click to add a revision clouds. 17 Using the same method learned previously. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. apply Seq. 12 In the drawing area. 10 In the Project Browser. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. 15 On the Options Bar. for Revision. select Revision Cloud.

select the titleblock. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. select Alphabetic. delete the first 3 characters. and rotation) to the revision schedule. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 25 Click OK twice. height. you edit the titleblock family. beginning with "D". for Sequence. for Numbering. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. For each revision. You do this so that the revision can be changed. 26 In the drawing area. Click Options. clear Issued.

and press DELETE. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. 28 In the alert dialog. Select Outline. 34 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. 33 Select the schedule header. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. for Build Schedule. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Revision Schedule. Select Grid lines. under Other. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. click Edit Family. click Edit. for Appearance. and click Properties. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. Working with Revisions | 365 . 38 In the Reload Family dialog. click Load into Projects. click Yes. select Bottom-up. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area.27 On the Options Bar. click Yes. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. and drag it above the schedule area. click Modify. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. Clear Blank row before data.

right-click Revision Schedule. for Heading. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. select 90° Counterclockwise. When the height property is variable. for Height. for Formatting. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. under Other. 46 Click OK twice. With a user-defined height. 40 Select the revision schedule header. enter Rev. select the revision schedule. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. open the titleblock family for editing. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. for Rotation on Sheet. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. and on the Options Bar. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. and click Properties. click Edit. 45 On the Appearance tab. select User defined. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser.

The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. click Load into Projects. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. 51 Save the file. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Yes. you learn to import information (such as images. text. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. Importing from Other Applications | 367 .

JPG. click to add text without a leader. and place it on a sheet. under Sheets. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . for Leader. 3 On the Options Bar. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 1 In the Project Browser.Importing Image Files In this exercise.rvt. click Training Files. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. 5 On the Design Bar.Title Sheet. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. under Sheets. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. double-click T . click Modify. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Text. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo.rvt. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. double-click T .Title Sheet.

with the new text box still selected. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window.doc text file in another window. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. click Modify. 6 Select the text. 9 On the Design Bar. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 11 Save the file. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 .

under Sheets.JPG. for Name. click Modify. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. for File name. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. and click Save. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and open Common\Fixture Schedule. and saved as Fixture Schedule. click Desktop. 10 On the Design Bar. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. double-click A102 .mdi. 12 Save the file. click Training Files. select the document writer. 3 In Microsoft Excel. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. This process may vary from system to system.Unit 18.xls.JPG. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click OK. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 4 Under Printer. click File menu ➤ Print. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.rvt. type Fixture Schedule. This step has been completed for you. This exercise demonstrates a common method.

The large floor plan. called dependent views. To effectively document this project. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. you break up the plan into sections. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. or footprint. as well as a large lab building. 371 . The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site.

372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views.

374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and click Rename. 4 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Level 2. The dependent view opens. and click OK. for Name. double-click Level 2. under Level 2. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. select the crop region. 6 In the drawing area.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and the model crop is the interior crop region. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. 3 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building.Aviary. 5 Click in the drawing area. enter Level 2 . The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. right-click Dependent on Level 2.

8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. click (Hide Crop Region). Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 . confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). 9 On the View Control Bar.

and on the Zoom flyout. 12 In the Project Browser. 15 Select the crop region. and click OK. right-click Level 2.Labs. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .10 Click in the drawing area. click Zoom To Fit. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. for Name. 13 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 2 . and on the Zoom flyout. and click Rename. click Zoom To Fit. 14 Click in the drawing area. 11 In the Project Browser.

click (Hide Crop Region). click Matchline. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . 20 Click in the drawing area. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. under Floor Plans.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. double-click Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. and on the Zoom flyout. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Zoom To Fit.

24 On the Design Bar. and click.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. click Finish Sketch. Click above the left corner of the lab building. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary.

and click Rename. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. right-click A101 . 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. click Level 2 .25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.Aviary. and click OK. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab. select 9.Unnamed. and drag it onto the sheet. expand Sheets. for Line Weight. under Floor Plans. click OK to accept the default titleblock. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 27 Under Matchline. select Double Dash. 31 In the Project Browser. 28 For Line Pattern. and click OK. 33 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . for Name. enter Level 2 Aviary.

Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.35 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. for Target view. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . 36 Use the same method to create another sheet.Aviary is selected. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. click Modify. 39 On the Options Bar. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . under Floor Plans. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.Labs dependent view on the sheet. and place the Level 2 . click View Reference.

select Floor Plan: Level 2 .Labs. 45 On the Zoom flyout. click Modify. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . for Target view. click Zoom To Fit. 41 On the Options Bar.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. 44 On the Design Bar. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.

NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. under Floor Plans. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. 47 On the View Control Bar. click the far right control. double-click Level 2 . click (Show Crop Region). and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 49 If. 48 Select the crop region. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . right-click. after modifying the annotation crop region. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display.Aviary.46 In the Project Browser.

but are not placed on sheets. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. click Zoom To Fit. select all views in the list. and click Apply Dependent Views. expand Level 1. 53 In the Select Views dialog. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. 52 In the Project Browser. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. right-click Level 2. under Floor Plans. and click OK.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 51 On the View Control Bar. 54 In the Project Browser. 55 On the Zoom flyout.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. right-click South Elevation. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The matchline is already placed in the view. click Training Files. 2 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .57 On the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. and double-click South Elevation.

expand South Elevation. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. 3 In the Project Browser. cropping the view to the lab building. 5 In the drawing area.Right. click (Hide Crop Region). and click Rename. 9 In the Project Browser. 7 On the View Control Bar. for Name. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. and click OK. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. for Name. enter South Elevation . 8 In the Project Browser. cropping the view to the aviary. right-click South Elevation. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . enter South Elevation . and click Rename. 4 In the Rename View dialog. and drag it toward the center of the view. select the Crop Region.The dependent view opens. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.Left. 11 Select the crop region.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

click Modify. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Perspective View on page 403. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. Creating a Perspective View | 403 .15 On the Design Bar. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

rvt.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The perspective view displays. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. c_Pool_House_in_progress. click Camera. on the View tab of the Design Bar. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

If the camera is not shown in the view.3 Zoom out. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. as necessary. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. With the camera shown. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. in the Project Browser. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. and select the crop boundary. as shown. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. and adjust the field of vision. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . right-click 3D View 1. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. Depending on camera placement. and click Show Camera.

under 3D Views. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window.6 In the Project Browser. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. and click OK.Day to open the view. double-click Exterior . Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. 7 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 10 Save the file. enter Exterior . 8 In the Project Browser.Day. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . right-click 3D View 1.

rvt. double-click Exterior . under 3D Views. and render a daytime view of the exterior. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. modify render settings.Day. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. c_Pool_House_in_progress.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. You then duplicate the view.

select Sky: Cloudy. 5 In the Rename dialog. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. You adjust cloud settings as required. under Lighting. select Spring Equinox. and click Rename. In this case. for New. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. You create a location and time for the rendering. 6 Click OK twice. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. select Medium. select Edit/New. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. and click Render. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. under Background.Santa Monica. NOTE If a background image is required. 3 In the Rendering dialog. 7 In the Rendering dialog. for Setting. 8 Under Quality.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. click (Show Rendering Dialog). for Sun. enter Spring Equinox . 3pm. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . see Re-orienting the Project on page 447.

Click Save. 10 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the model.png). Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. After the image is rendered. click Export. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Show the rendering. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . click Desktop.9 In the Rendering dialog. select Portable Network Graphics (*. For Files of type. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference.

highlight 9 :Sconce Light . under Ungrouped Lights. and select the last light. and click OK. for Name. 25 Using the same method.Flat Round : 60W . click New. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights .Day. add 30 :Sconce Light . 22 Using the same method. click New.120V through 14 :Sconce Light .Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. and click Move to Group. for Scheme. under Lighting. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. 27 In the Rendering dialog. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. and click OK. dialog. you duplicate the view and change the settings. verify that Pool Lights is selected. under Ungrouped Lights.Flat Round : 60W .120V through 35 :Sconce Light . press and hold SHIFT. 16 With the Exterior .Night.Night.120V to the Pool Lights group. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . for Name. To select a sequential list. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. and click OK.Flat Round : 60W .120V. and click Artificial Lights. click Render. select the first light. 19 In the New Light Group dialog.Night view open.Exterior .Day view to Exterior . 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Group Options. click OK. under 3D Views. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. select Exterior: Artificial only. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. right-click Exterior . under Group Options. click Dialog).Flat Round : 60W . enter Pool House Lights. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. on the View Control Bar. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. enter Pool Lights.

and click OK. you change the brightness of the exposure. 30 In the Rendering dialog. 32 Save the file. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. click Show the model.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . After the image is rendered. under Image. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. enter 4. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. Rendering an Interior View on page 411. click Adjust Exposure. for Exposure Value. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. In this example.

you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and finally. define the perspective view and rendering settings. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. Adding RPC People In this exercise. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house.rvt.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. render the views.

the person’s line of sight.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. click Component. Exact placement is not important. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Select the figure. 5 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. select RPC Female : YinYin. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. and place the component inside the pool house. 4 In the Type Selector. ■ (Rotate). and on the Edit toolbar. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. click Modify. Adding RPC People | 413 . click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure.

By default. 12 Click OK 3 times. on the Options Bar. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. click Edit. for Render Appearance Properties. under Parameters. select Cast Reflections. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. you can enable this option. In order to see the figure’s reflection. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. click Modify. click Edit/New.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. 14 Save the file. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. under Identity Data. 13 On the Design Bar. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected.

Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process.15 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera.rvt. c_Pool_House_in_progress. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Camera.

4 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. and click OK. select Section Box. and click Properties. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. under 3D Views. right-click 3D View 1. under Extents.The perspective view displays. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

9 In the Project Browser. in addition to the 3D view. under Floor Plans. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . 11 In the 3D view.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. 8 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevations). select the section box. double-click South. double-click Level 1. In order to accurately adjust the section box.

13 In the South Elevation view. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select the section box. 14 In the 3D view.12 In the floor plan view. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. size the box as shown. size the box as shown. right-click.

you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. To create a daytime view. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. and curtain walls. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. and render the interior view.15 Maximize the 3D view. 17 Save the file. doors that contain windows or glass. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall.

select Draft. 4 In the Rendering dialog. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you turn them off for this scene. clear Pool Lights. 8 In the Rendering dialog. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. and click OK. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. select Interior: Artificial only. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. right-click 3D View 1. 7 Under Quality. and click OK. under Lighting. under 3D Views. click Render. 5 Click Artificial Lights. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. You can specify a lower quality. 2 In the Rename View dialog. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. enter Interior .Night. After these settings are established. 3 On the View Control Bar.rvt. for Setting. and click Rename. for Scheme.

17 In the Rendering dialog. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. select Spring Equinox . select Curtain Walls. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. (Show Rendering Dialog). select Interior: Sun only. select Region. For more information on daylight portals. and click Render. select Edit. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. the daylight portals can be turned on. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. but the space will receive standard daylighting. 13 In the Rendering dialog.Day. click Copy To Custom. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. You create a view for the interior during the day.Santa Monica. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. and click OK.Night. In this case. for Daylight Portal Options. for Scheme. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. The preset schemes are read-only. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. 3pm. For sunlit interiors. for Sun. in order to turn on daylight portals. By default they are turned off. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. click 14 For Setting. right-click Interior .9 Close the Rendering dialog. you must create a custom setting. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior .

(Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter 10. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. enter 1. In the next steps. under Image. and on the Options Bar. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. select the column on the right. click Properties). Click OK. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect.18 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. For Saturation. click Adjust Exposure. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. 20 In the Rendering dialog. and close the Rendering dialog.

and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . clear Region. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. 28 In the Rendering dialog. add a bump map to create texture. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. the render time increases significantly. select High.22 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 In the Rendering dialog. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. select Scale (locked proportions). 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. select Unfinished. For Rotate. 30 In the drawing area. 24 In the Materials dialog. Click OK. 23 With the column still selected. click the dimensions for Size. 32 In the Rendering dialog. select the crop boundary. select Based on wood grain. For Bump. For Amount. click OK. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. click (Show Rendering Dialog). As size and DPI are increased. for Setting.6. select Printer. You change the varnish setting. and click OK. select Wood. enter 90. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. enter 5''. For Width. 26 Click Update Preview. and on the Options Bar. and click Render. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. for Resolution. under Output Settings.

A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . In a plan view.The rendered image displays. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. The walkthrough path is a spline. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. Usually. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. but you can also define it in a 3D. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. or section view. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. independent of the Revit Architecture software. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. elevation. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view.

and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. click Settings ➤ Project Units. and open Common\c_Townhouse. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. proceeds through the dining room. on the Options Bar. If you prefer to use metric values. verify that Perspective is selected. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. and change unit formats as desired.rvt. and click the tab in the context menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and ends in the far corner of the living room. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. click Training Files. and double-click 1st Floor. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. right-click in the Design Bar. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . expand Floor Plans. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. expand Views (all). click Walkthrough.

426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . on the Options Bar.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. and double-click Walkthrough 1. click Finish.

Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. and for Height.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. for Frame. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. verify that Field of view is selected. select the crop boundary. on the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). click the dimensions for Size. 14 Click . 17 Click . 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. and click OK. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. If it is not. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 On the View menu. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 11 Under Change. enter 9''. and select the crop boundary. for Width. and click OK. enter 16''. click Edit Walkthrough. 16 On the Options Bar. enter 1.

under Floor Plans.The walkthrough plays. and click OK. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. 2 On the Options Bar. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . press ESC. click (Element Properties). Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. under Extents. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. clear Far Clip Active.rvt. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. proceed to the next exercise. click Edit Walkthrough. double-click 1st Floor. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. c_Townhouse. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.

for Controls. 6 On the Options Bar. select Path. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. and drag it to the location shown. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. You can move any camera target or key frame position. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). 7 Click the third key frame position.

Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. click Edit Walkthrough.rvt. shading with edges. under Walkthroughs. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. select <Shading>. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. and click OK. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Output Length. specifying the number of frames. click File menu ➤ Save As. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. enter 15. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 3 Under Format. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. reducing the size of the image. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. c_Townhouse. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. The walkthrough is recorded. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. and click OK. If you are unsure of what option to use. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. and click Save. for Compressor. 9 To play the walkthrough. . shading. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. for Frames/sec. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. hidden line. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. for Model Graphics Style. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. 8 If you want to save this exercise. or rendering. on the Options Bar. double-click Walkthrough 1. When you export the walkthrough. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise.

you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. In this tutorial. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. More specifically. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. 431 .

expand Floor Plans.Creating a Solar Study .rvt. and double-click 01 Entry. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. as shown. expand Views (all). 4 On the View toolbar. and open Common\c_Solar_Study.Courtyard View In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click shown. click Camera. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. (SteeringWheels). 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. click Training Files. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. A 3D view is created. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

double-click 01 Entry. 3 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 7 In the Project Browser. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a section cutaway view. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and.5 On the Design Bar. enter Solar Study . right-click 3D View 1. under Floor Plans. expand 3D Views. click Save As.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. 9 On the File menu. and click Rename. click Section. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. as shown. and save the exercise file with a unique name. if necessary. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 .Courtyard View. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. click Modify.

click . 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 11 On the SteeringWheel. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. and click OK. expand Sections. and click Rename.5 On the Design Bar. (SteeringWheels). click Modify. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 7 In the Project Browser. as shown. right-click Section 1. 8 In the Rename View dialog. double-click the section head. 13 On the Design Bar. click 10 On the View toolbar. 6 To view the section. click Modify. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the View Control Bar. you create a plan cutaway view. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. clear Section Boxes. as shown. 5 In the Project Browser. then Fine. do not display many elements in 3D. under 3D Views. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. In some cases. click . and click OK. including the house. On the Annotation Categories tab. click Save. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. then select Medium. 4 In the Project Browser. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. 17 To hide the section box. double-click 01 Entry. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Typical plan views. right-click {3D}. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. click Callout. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. 6 In the Rename View dialog. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. 15 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. 18 On the File menu. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. and click OK. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser.14 In the Project Browser. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. and click OK.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Rename. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . 19 Proceed to the next exercise.

click (SteeringWheels). 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. 15 Select the Roof. as shown. 9 On the SteeringWheel. 16 On the View Control Bar. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. as shown. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side.8 On the View toolbar. so you can see into the building from the top. 11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu.

right-click {3D}. 21 On the File menu. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. and click Rename. and click OK. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site.17 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. 19 In the Rename View dialog. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. under 3D Views. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. click Save. 18 In the Project Browser.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. 20 On the View Control Bar. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study .

Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson.Creating Solar Studies . You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. enter Summer Solstice. click .Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. USA is selected. and time. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . select Los Angeles. click . click click OK. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. 2 On the View Control Bar. For the Multi-Day solar study. For this study. CA. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. Click the Single-Day tab. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. Los Angeles. USA. you specify the location. MA. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 9 In the Name dialog.Boston. leave the slider at 50. and click OK. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. expand Views (all). 5 Click the Single-Day tab. . or multi-day solar study. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. for City. and click Duplicate. and time range. you specify the location. 4 For Sun Position. date. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. date range. You can create a still. single-day. 10 Under Place. For the Single-Day solar study. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . expand 3D Views. 3 Select Cast Shadows.

Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. Los Angeles. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. select December 22. select Winter Solstice. For Time Range. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 In the Name dialog. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. and click Duplicate. on the Single-Day tab. click OK. click Save. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . for Sun Position. Los Angeles. 2008. for Date. 7 On the Options Bar. 2008. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. click . 2 On the View Control Bar. and click OK.Courtyard View is currently displayed. 6 On the View Control Bar. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. enter 20 and press ENTER. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. and click OK. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Los Angeles is selected. confirm that Summer Solstice. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 8 On the Options Bar. enter Winter Solstice. select June 22. click OK. 19 On the File menu. click . you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. Clear Ground Plane at Level. Under Frame. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. ■ For Time Interval. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. enter 10 and press ENTER.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. under Frame. 14 In this case.

select Summer Solstice. The solar study animation plays. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. 14 On the Options Bar. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. click To play the animation from start to finish. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. on the Single-Day tab. click . click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. . and click OK. click To display the next sequential frame. click . you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . . 13 On the View Control Bar. click . 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry. click Text. for Sun Position. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. approximately as shown. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. under Floor Plans. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. . 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.■ To display the next key frame. Los Angeles. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. click OK.

verify that Cast Shadows is selected. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. 5 In the Project Browser. click Lines. as shown. 6 On the View Control Bar. On the Options Bar. click .■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. 8 For Sun Position. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . Click and enter Dining. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. as shown. approximately as shown. click .

click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. ■ For Frames per second. under Output Length. click OK. clear Section Boxes. and click OK. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. verify that the value is set to 15. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. if necessary. On the Annotation Categories tab. on the Single-Day tab. 14 Click outside of the section box. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. 15 To hide the section box. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. select Frame Range. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 11 To display the section box. and click OK. select Section Boxes. as shown. and enter 5 to 50. Los Angeles. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. 12 In the drawing area. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. select the section box. select Summer Solstice.

and enter 5 to 10. Los Angeles. of the animation separately. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. for Model Graphics Style. To view the animation.Los Angeles. click OK. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. verify that Hidden Line is selected. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. for Model Graphics Style. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. on the Single-Day tab. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 .rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. and click OK. click . For File Name. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. under Output Length. 3 For Sun Position. select Frame Range. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. For Files of Type. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. or frame. verify that Hidden Line is selected. you open each image. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Under Format. 2 On the View Control Bar. verify that the value is set to 15. For Frames per second. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. select AVI Files. Click OK.■ ■ Under Format. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. For Dimensions. for Compressor. To maintain the proportions of the frame. enter 450 in the first field (width). you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. select Winter Solstice. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save.

rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. enter 450 in the first field (width).Los Angeles. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser.■ For Dimensions. In this example. under 3D Views. click the Desktop icon. or any single-frame format. or GIF. 8 Click Save. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . select PNG. TIFF. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. depending on the Frame Range. Click OK. click Save. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. as shown: 9 On the File menu. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. such as JPEG. For File name. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. BMP. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. For Files of Type. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop.

2 Select the section box in the drawing area. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. as shown. NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 .

click the Multi-Day tab. for File name enter 2pm . 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. 5 Select the roof. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. On the Annotation Categories tab. For Time Interval. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click OK. 8 On the View Control Bar.Los Angeles . Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. for Sun Position. USA. and click OK. and click Duplicate. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Time. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . and click OK. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.Boston.Week Interval. MA. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and on the View Control Bar. 12 In the Name dialog. select One week. and click OK. clear Section Boxes. specify 2:00 pm.

click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. Re-orienting the Project | 447 . such as East . select Full Frames (Uncompressed). ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. When you mirror a project. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. under Floor Plans. In the Length/Format dialog. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Click the Desktop icon.West or North . and click OK. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. for File Name. double-click 01 Entry. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click Save. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. click OK. and annotations in non-drafting views. you mirror all model elements.South. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. for Compressor. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. model views. 17 On the View Control Bar. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop.

5 In the warning dialog. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. For additional information.West axis. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. The project is mirrored along the East . you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. Then. select the roof. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click OK. right-click.West. under 3D Views. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. In this exercise. 6 On the Standard toolbar.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. select East . View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the drawing area. and click OK. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.

and select Winter Solstice. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. and click OK. select Cast Shadows.3 On the View Control Bar. click . 8 For Sun Position. click the Still tab. specify 11:00 AM for time. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 5 For Sun Position. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. select Summer Solstice. change the time back to 12:00 PM. and click OK. Orienting to True North | 449 . 11 For Sun Position. For example. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. 10 Under Date and Time. click Apply. and click OK. click . to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. on the Still tab. 12 Under Date and Time. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click .

21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 18 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry. the view settings must be set for True North. and select Winter Solstice. click . under Floor Plans. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. When a project is started.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. and click OK. 19 In the Project Browser. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. for Orientation. 14 On the View Control Bar. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. click OK. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. 15 For Sun Position. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. select True North. click OK. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Properties. right click 01 Entry. click the Still tab. This process establishes the view setting to True North. and click OK. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North.

click above the end of the magenta line representing True North.■ To establish the True North direction. ■ To establish the new direction of True North. as shown. click toward the top of the screen. The floor plan rotates in the view. Orienting to True North | 451 .

select True North Orientation. and click OK. select Project North. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. select Summer Solstice. right-click. right-click. for Orientation. click . 33 For Sun Position. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. select True North. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click 01 Entry. enter True North Orientation. right-click 01 Entry. and click Element Properties. under 3D Views. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. and click Properties. click the Still tab. and click Rename. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 27 In the Rename View dialog. 32 On the View Control Bar. 28 In the Project Browser. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. 25 In the Project Browser. for Orientation.23 In the Project Browser. and click Apply. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North.

For Files of Type. verify that AVI Files is selected. click OK. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. Click Save. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. enter 600 in the first field. click Summer Solstice. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Los Angeles.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Format. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. click the Desktop icon. for Dimensions. In the Length/Format dialog. For File Name. Orienting to True North | 453 . In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. Click OK. click the Single-Day tab. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. and click OK. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Compressor. and click OK. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop.

select Edit/New. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. for Setting. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. select Medium. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. Rendered views do not have this limitation. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. For Sun. In the Name dialog. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. click Render. In this exercise. for Scheme. under Settings. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. for Date and Time. select 12/22. 2 In the Project Browser. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Under Lighting. select Winter Solstice. Since a rendered image is temporary. and click Duplicate. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. under 3D Views.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. under 3D Views. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. capturing it. (Show Rendering Dialog). under Quality. and 2:00 PM. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 1 In the Project Browser. select Interior: Sun only. and exporting it as a JPEG image. and click OK. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar.

6 In the Rendering dialog. and click Save. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Desktop. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. and click OK. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. verify that JPEG Files is selected. enter living area_winter solstice. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. click Export. Rendering an Interior View | 455 . For Files of type. click Save to Project. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser.

456 .

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. you explore the stylistic approach. and section boxes.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. and details. a consultant. however. They include rendering. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. Using the pre-built building model. type. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. Co-house. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. For the realistic approach. or the client. 457 . advanced model graphics. you can choose between realism and stylistics. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. In this tutorial. elevations. Other tools in the software. linework. length. an outside reviewer. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. Whether the audience is the general contractor. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. sections. When organizing presentation graphics. In this series of exercises. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views.

Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. you create a presentation floor plan. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. To fit the floor plan into the analytique. you create a copy of the plan. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . Cnst. click in the drawing area. and click OK. under Floor Plans.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. click Training Files. and click Rename.rvt. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Cnst. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. exit the menu. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. right-click 2nd Flr. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. sections. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. 8 Click OK. and Up Arrow. Down Arrow. this represents the view getting smaller. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. UP Text. click the Scale control and select 1:100. and clear DOWN Text. elevations. and click Save. navigate to the folder of your choice. 7 Under Visibility.rvt.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. expand the Stairs category. This turns off the visibility of all tags. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. 11 In the Save As directory. click the Annotation Categories tab. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. dimensions. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. No annotations display in the view. and other annotations in this view. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click . you can select any city. you can create. however. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. NOTE For this step.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click . If you select a different city. click the Place tab. on the Still tab. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. select Cast Shadows. 1:00 PM. 12 Click OK. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. for Date and Time. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. modify. 7 For Place. MA. For Sun Position. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. select By Date. select Boston. Time and Place. and click OK. Cnst. click (Shadows Off). 9 For City. 2 On the View Control Bar. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . At that place. 3 On the View Control Bar. Within a project. click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. specify 35. 6 Under Settings. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. the darker the shadows. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. double-click it in the Project Browser. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. specify 10/27. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Sun and Shadow Settings. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. and select 1st Flr.rvt. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. ■ For Contrast. The higher the number.

Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. for Sun Position. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. click OK. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. . This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. click (Shadows On). 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. clear Ground Plane at Level. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. under Settings. and click OK. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

click Modify. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. and click to place it. select Arch Portrait. and notice the view title. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 4 In the Views dialog. The viewport displays at the cursor. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click View. right-click the Design Bar. click Add View.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. TIP If the View tab is not available. and click OK. and click Add View to Sheet. 6 On the Design Bar. click Sheet. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 .

The viewport no longer displays a view title. for Show Title. click Edit/New. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. For this analytique. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 11 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click Duplicate. 12 In the Name dialog. select No. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. To accomplish this. click OK. click . and click Activate View. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. enter Presentation. and click OK. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. under Graphics. 9 On the Options Bar.

21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. TIP Use care when sketching this chain.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. select Invisible lines. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. 18 On the Options Bar. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. 20 On the Options Bar. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. 22 On the Design Bar. and select Chain. and the boundary of the region. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. click . click Filled Region. fill properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 In the Type Selector. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. If necessary. click Region Properties. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. When you finish drawing the chain. click Edit/New. click .

33 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. and click Deactivate View. enter Solid Black. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. under Graphics. and click OK. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. under Name. for Sheet Name. under Identity Data. and click OK. click Duplicate. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. select Solid fill. click Finish Sketch. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. click . Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. 25 In the Name dialog. enter Presentation. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. and click OK. scroll down. click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. and click View Properties. for Fill Pattern.24 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet.

Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. right-click South. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 .

and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. select Cast Shadows. under Visibility. under Pattern Overrides. enter Presentation South Elevation. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Time and Place. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. under Elevations. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. under Visibility. scroll up. on the Model Categories tab. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Visible. click in the drawing area. and click Advanced Model Graphics. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. and clear Elevation Swing. under Settings. and click OK. click (Shadows Off). 14 For Sun Position. click Override. and click OK. and click OK. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 12 Under Shadow. specify 35. click OK. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 9 Click OK. 11 On the View Control Bar. click in the Walls row. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. By changing the angle of the sun. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. specify 2:30 PM. click . select By Date. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. right-click Copy of South. click Duplicate. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 13 For Contrast. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. 18 For Time. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. exit the menu. expand the Doors category.2 In the Project Browser. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click Rename. 16 In the Name dialog. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view.

double-click A105 . select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Add View to Sheet. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet.rvt. click Add View. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. 3 In the Views dialog. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane.Presentation.

5 In the Type Selector.The viewport displays a view title. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Viewport : Presentation. The view title no longer displays.

6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. 7 On the Design Bar. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. click Modify. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 .

click Section. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. select 1: 100. double-click 1st Flr. Cnst. 3 On the Options Bar. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . for Scale. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and use the flip arrows if necessary. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). 4 Add the section shown below.

7 On the Options Bar. select 1 : 100. for Scale. To fit correctly in the analytique. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. this view needs to be rotated 180°. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. expand Sections (Callout 1).Section 2 is added to the building model. as shown. click Callout. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. To accomplish this. and double-click Section 2.

11 In the Rename View dialog. 17 Under Visibility. enter Presentation Section 2. and click OK. click Override. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click OK. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. 15 Under Visibility. click in the Walls row. scroll up. 10 In the Project Browser. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. under Sections (Callout 1). right-click Callout of Section 2.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. expand the Doors category. click the Model Categories tab. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . double-click Presentation Section 2. under Sections (Callout 1). click Modify. and click Rename. under Pattern Overrides. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and clear Elevation Swing. clear Visible. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 12 In the Project Browser.

Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. 22 On the View Control Bar. When you select the crop region. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. (Hide Crop Region). and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 20 Click OK. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. click The crop regions no longer display.

Click Apply. under Sections (Callout 1). you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. specify 35. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. ■ For Sun Position. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. In addition. select Cast Shadows. 2 On the View Control Bar. specify the following: Under Shadow. 3 On the View Control Bar. In the steps that follow. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. in the Project Browser. The shadows do not offer much contrast.rvt. 6 In the Name dialog. click . For Contrast. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. and click OK. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . double-click Presentation Section 2. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. click Duplicate.

Select Relative to View. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. was added to this training file for training purposes. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. for Silhouette style. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Silhouette Edges. specify 70°. For Azimuth. specify 135°. NOTE The line style. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. Silhouette Edges. and click Advanced Model Graphics. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Directly. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . and click OK. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. For Altitude. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. click OK. click (Shadows On).7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. Click OK. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Add View. under Sheets (all). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.Presentation.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. and click Add View to Sheet. double-click A105 . 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Section: Presentation Section 2. and click to place the selected view. 3 In the Views dialog.

move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. double-click Section 2. select Viewport : Presentation. click Modify. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. In the steps that follow. under Sections (Callout 1). Using a clock as a reference. 9 On the Edit toolbar. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. The view title no longer displays. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise.5 In the Type Selector. and press Enter. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. 6 On the Design Bar. The section needs to be rotated 180°. you click to specify the start radius. To rotate an object. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. click (Rotate).

under Sheets (all). double-click A105 . 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown.The callout rotates 180°. 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.Presentation. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned.

you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. and drag it up and to the left as shown. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. After applying the view template to a new section view. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views.

4 In the View Templates dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. enter Presentation. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1). 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. under Sections (Type 1). and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Type 1). and click Rename. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Section 1. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 3 In the New View Template dialog. double-click Presentation Section 2. and click OK. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. right-click Copy of Section 1. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click OK. 7 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you can simply apply the presentation view template. enter Presentation Section 1.rvt.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

annotations. and click OK. select Section: Presentation Section 1. under Names. select 90° Counterclockwise. select Viewport : Presentation.Presentation. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. click Add View. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. and elevation swings no longer display. and click Activate View. lighting fixtures. 14 In the Type Selector. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. 18 Right-click the viewport. for Rotation on Sheet. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Views dialog. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Presentation. and click Deactivate View.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. and click OK. under Sheets (all). Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . The furniture. 15 Right-click the viewport. double-click A105 . under Graphics. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. and click Add View to Sheet.

traditional analytiques contain a detail. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. such as a tracery window or a column capital. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. In this exercise.

rvt.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. right-click Callout of Section 1. After you add the callout. under Sections (Type 1). under Sections (Callout 1). and click Rename. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . 4 In the Project Browser. double-click Section 1. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Callout. click Modify. as shown. select the callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

enter Presentation Callout. clear Crop Region Visible. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Sections (Callout 1). and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. clear Annotation Crop. 8 Right-click. under Extents. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK.5 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Select the crop region. and click View Properties. as shown. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. double-click Presentation Callout.

15 On the Design Bar. click Add View. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 In the Type Selector. double-click A105 . 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Custom. and click Add View to Sheet. and click Activate View. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 . select Viewport : Presentation.Presentation. For Scale Value 1.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Views dialog. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. click Modify. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. select Section: Presentation Callout. specify 22. Click OK.

double-click Presentation Callout. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .19 Right-click the callout presentation view. under Sections (Callout 1). click Region Properties. In the steps that follow. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. When finished. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and move it to the position shown below. click Edit/New. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. and make adjustments as necessary. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 On the Design Bar. and click Deactivate View. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. activate the viewport. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. click Filled Region.

Presentation.25 In the Type Properties dialog. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). for Fill Pattern. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. and click Activate View. select Solid fill. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Finish Sketch. When you are finished. double-click A105 . and click OK 3 times. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. on the Design Bar. click . click Filled Region. 28 In the Project Browser. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport.

32 On the Design Bar. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .31 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. and sketch the rectangle shown below. click (Show Crop Region). The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. 34 Select the crop region. click . 33 On the View Control Bar.

35 On the View Control Bar. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. and click Deactivate View. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. click (Hide Crop Region). you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet.

double-click Isometric. click (Shadows Off). 5 On the View Control Bar. 3 On the View Control Bar. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and apply shadows to the views. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .rvt. and click 1 : 200. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. click the Scale control. under 3D Views. and click Advanced Model Graphics.

6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. under 3D Views. Select 1st Flr. right-click Isometric. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. and click Rename. 8 In the Name dialog. Select Relative to View. 15 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. in the list. select Cast Shadows. For Sun Position. specify 135°. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . under 3D Views. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. For Azimuth. under 3D Views. and click Rename. under Extents. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. Cnst. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. double-click Isometric 2. Click OK. select Directly. specify 45°. enter Isometric 2. Select Ground Plane at Level. 13 In the Project Browser. and click OK. specify 35. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. click . 12 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 14 In the Project Browser. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. enter Isometric 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Isometric 1. For Contrast. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Altitude. and click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Silhouette style. A section box displays around the building model. under 3D Views. select Section Box. select Silhouette Edges. click Duplicate.

19 Select the section box. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. When you are finished. click Modify on the Design Bar. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. as shown. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. Grips display on each face of the section box. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . TIP Notice the rotation symbol. You can use this to rotate the section box.

under Sheets (all). click Modify on the Design Bar. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under 3D Views.Presentation. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. If desired. you can adjust the plane location. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . 25 To hide the section box. and click OK. under 3D Views. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. clear Section Boxes. The section box no longer displays. 23 In the Rename View dialog. On the Annotation Categories tab. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. 29 To hide the section box. double-click Isometric 2. and click OK. under 3D Views. and click Rename. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. enter Isometric 3. On the Annotation Categories tab. In the Type Selector. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. clear Section Boxes. double-click A105 . select Viewport : Presentation. 27 Select the section box. under 3D Views. 24 In the Project Browser. 31 In the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. the stairs and railings may display. right-click Isometric 2.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. double-click Isometric 3. and click OK. under 3D Views. Next. 21 In the Project Browser. make a copy of the view. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Project Browser. When you are finished. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box.

drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. under 3D Views. The filled region partially covers the view. In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. In the Type Selector. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. 33 In the Project Browser.32 In the Project Browser. select Viewport : Presentation. under 3D Views.

click Edit. and click Activate View. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. This will make it easier to draw lines. click Lines. 42 Using the drawing tools.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click Region Properties. 36 On the Design Bar. select Transparent. click Edit/New. 39 For Background. 41 On the Design Bar. 40 Click OK twice. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . for Fill Patterns. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. select Concrete. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 35 Select the poche filled region. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. The image below shows the redrawn lines. On the Options Bar.

click Finish Sketch. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. click Region Properties.43 On the Design Bar. 47 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. 46 Click OK twice. for Fill Pattern. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. select Solid fill. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click Deactivate View.

a cutaway perspective view. then you specify the eye direction and range. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . you create the final view for the analytique. Cnst. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. you add it to the presentation sheet.rvt. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. click Camera. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click 1st Flr. The view opens immediately.

7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Contrast. and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. select Cast Shadows. and click OK. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . for Silhouette style. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). For Sun Position. 6 On the View Control Bar. specify the following: Under Shadow. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. and click OK. click . specify 35. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Silhouette Edges. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Name.

13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. select Section Box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Grips display on each plane of the section box. A section box now cuts through the building model. 12 Select the section box. under Extents. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 .

select Scale (locked proportions). for Width. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. click Size. 18 On the View Control Bar. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. and click OK.14 Select the crop region. enter 165 mm. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. On the Annotation Categories tab. under Sheets (all). 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you must specify the actual size of the image. and click OK. 17 Under Model Crop Size. In the Type Selector. clear Section Boxes. select Viewport : Presentation. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. double-click A105 . 15 On the Options Bar. 19 To hide the section box. under 3D Views. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. under Change.Presentation. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Project Browser. click (Hide Crop Region).

select a font. and click OK. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 6 In the Name dialog. and click OK.rvt. enter Title. select Text : Title. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 .22 Click File menu ➤ Save. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . select the same font as the title. and click OK. click Duplicate. click Duplicate. under Text. click Edit/New. 10 In the Name dialog. click Text. under Text. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. click OK. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click it in the Project Browser. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.Presentation sheet is not the active view. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. specify a text size of 40 mm. click . 4 In the Element Properties dialog. specify a text size of 6 mm. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. enter Description. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 16 In the Type Selector. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. click Modify. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Text : Description. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 18 On the Design Bar.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

Once the model has been imported.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. you create a small building from the front mass form. you can easily add detail with Revit components. 507 . After you import the SketchUp model. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. In this tutorial. that compose the building. curtain walls. and roofs. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. such as walls.

or select from a list. For Layers. For Colors. click Training Files. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. select All. you create a Revit Architecture project. click OK. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. and click OK. visible elements. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. buildings. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the New Project dialog. 6 In the Save As dialog. enter SketchUp Model.skp. Click the Sketchup file. Double-click the Common folder. click Create Mass. click the Massing tab. For Import units. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. select Preserve. under Template file. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 10 In the Name dialog.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. select Auto-Detect. right-click in the Design Bar. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. and not in the library. for File name. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. For Files of type. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric.rte. click OK. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. and click Save. 9 In the informational dialog. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. select SketchUp Files. enter Import SketchUp. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project.

The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from.Center. select Level 1. In a new project. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. click the Close button. select Manual . depending on the complexity of the project. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. 17 In the warning dialog. click . and roofs. 16 On the Design Bar. curtain walls. 14 On the View toolbar. For Place at level. click Finish Mass. Click Open. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. such as walls.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. ■ ■ For Positioning. Level 1 is the only choice.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. verify Level 2 is selected. such as walls. for Level. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . curtain walls. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. 4 On the Options Bar. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. that compose the building. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. After you create the building from the mass faces.400mm displays.18 Proceed to the next exercise. select the face so that it highlights in red. click Roof by Face. verify Basic Roof: Generic . You turn their visibility off to view only the building. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. and roofs. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. 3 In the Type Selector. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. and on the View Control Bar.

8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. click Create Roof. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . click to display masses. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. on the Options Bar. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. A roof is created from the mass face. 9 On the Options Bar.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. verify that Select Multiple is selected. 6 On the Options Bar. To see the new roof. on the View toolbar. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. click Create Roof.

click Roof by Face.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. 14 On the Options Bar. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Create Roof.

and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. for Loc Line. click roofs that you created. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . 22 In the Type Selector. click Modify to end the command. 23 On the Options Bar. click Wall by Face. select Core Face: Exterior. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. verify Basic Wall: Generic .200mm displays. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass.15 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar.

28 In the Type Selector. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 25 On the View toolbar. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. click Curtain System by Face. click to view only the walls and roofs.24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays.

32 On the View toolbar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 . click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. 31 Using the same technique. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms.30 On the Options Bar. click Create System.

and on the Options Bar. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. and on the Options Bar. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . and select it. click Curtain System. click Roof by Face. click Wall by Face.35 On the Design Bar. 38 Select the mass face shown below. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. click Create Roof. click Create System. select the other wall. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below.

46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. and select the mass face shown below. click Wall by Face. click Camera. 42 On the View toolbar. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. specify a point to place the camera. Below the right corner of the view. click to view the building that you have created.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . double-click Level 1.

48 On the View toolbar. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . specify a point for the camera target. click your building in the view. Click the frame to display its grips.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. to view only the walls. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. roofs. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. The perspective view created by the camera displays. as shown.

select Center. Under Grid 1 Pattern. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Under Grid 2 Pattern.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. select Center. Click OK. and select the left curtain system in the view. click Modify. for Justification. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. 50 On the Options Bar. click . for Justification. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 .

61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 55 Right-click. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. double-click {3D}. click Door. and move the roof edges as shown below. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 59 On the View toolbar. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. double-click 3D View 1. 56 In the Project Browser. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.54 Select each roof to display its grips. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . and click Cancel to end the command. under 3D Views. 63 In the Type Selector.

64 Add doors to the building as shown below. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 . 65 Save and close the drawing.

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

Creating an Entrance In this exercise. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. to resize the system. and mullions. you need to select a panel. Like walls. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. To switch panel types. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. 525 . and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This affects the entire curtain system. To change grids. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. and you can change these elements individually. panel. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. Like windows. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. and they are not windows. you need to change the length of the wall.rvt. click Training Files.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. you select the grid. grid lines. or you can use a specific curtain system command. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. Unlike windows. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For example. you create a curtain system using the wall command. You can add curtain systems with the wall command.

6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. 4 In the Type Selector. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .1 In the Project Browser. click Wall. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. and double-click Ground Floor. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

8 In the Project Browser. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. Creating an Entrance | 527 . expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. and double-click Southeast Isometric.

enter 1200. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. using curtain grids.11 Select the curtain system. and room bounding. For Top Offset. top constraint. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. top and base attachments. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. and click (Properties). 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. Click OK. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels.

and click Rename. Creating an Entrance | 529 . and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. and resize the crop boundary as shown. 25 On the Design Bar. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser.a. right-click Elevation 1 . 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. click Elevation. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. 18 In the Project Browser. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 20 In the drawing area. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.

27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. while pressing CTRL. select SECOND FLOOR. one larger than the other. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. click Modify.26 While pressing CTRL. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. and SEVENTH FLOOR. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. FIFTH FLOOR. and click OK. FOURTH FLOOR. 33 On the Design Bar. Click to place another grid line. SIXTH FLOOR. Click to create a vertical grid. THIRD FLOOR. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. select the 3 grid lines you just placed.

click Add or Remove Segments. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. you add a doorway to the curtain system.Next. and on the Options Bar. Creating an Entrance | 531 . Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. The two segments are removed. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. Instead of using the Door command. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. and then select the segment above it. The segment line style changes to dashed. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them.

select One Segment. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. 39 On the Design Bar. 42 Place dimensions as shown. 40 On the Options Bar.38 Using the same method. and lock them. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. click Curtain Grid. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .

Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). click in any white space to exit the editor. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. Use the following image as a guide. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. Creating an Entrance | 533 . 43 Delete the dimensions.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids.

click Training Files. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. This changes the graphics style of the Next. 56 In the Project Browser. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. double-click Entrance Elevation. The panel changes to a double door. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. 52 On the Type Selector. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. under Elevations. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. They are part of the curtain panel category. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. 57 On the View Control Bar. on the new curtain system you added. 55 In the Project Browser. 54 On the Design Bar. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. . Now. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. These panels schedule as doors.rfa. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. and click Wireframe. click Modify. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors.Next. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. not as curtain panels. click view. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line.

click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. click System Panel : Solid. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. 61 With the panel still selected. and the solid panels display in white. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. The glazed panels display in blue. click . 65 On the View Control Bar. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. Creating an Entrance | 535 . 63 Click OK twice. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels.60 On the Type Selector.

5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Save As. click Mullion. select Grid Line Segment. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 4 On the Options Bar.68 On the File menu. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. 2 On the Options Bar. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. select Entire Grid Line.rvt.

6 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. so you remove them next. because their width reduces the size of the doors. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . clickModify. there are a few that you do not want. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. You are going to change some mullion joins. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. however. 10 Delete the mullions below them. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. select All Empty Segments. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

Two mullion join controls display. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. Finally. you can also right-click. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. click Modify. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 15 On the Design Bar. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 14 Click the top mullion control. 17 Save the file. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. 16 In the Project Browser. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. double-click Southeast Isometric.

9 Place the second point at the lower right side. under Floor Plans. 4 In the Type Selector. you add a curtain system using the wall command. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. for Top Constraint. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. (Arc passing through three points). enter 1200. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. For Top Offset. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Finally. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . double-click GROUND FLOOR.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. Click OK. 7 On the Options Bar. Curved Curtain System | 539 . 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. click Wall. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc.

click Curtain Grid. You are going to use one of these snaps points. under Elevations. and then sixteenths. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. you place grids on the system. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. Next. eighths. Divide the halves into quarters. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. double-click East.

300mm. 18 In the Type Selector. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. Next. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. click Modify. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. 16 On the Design Bar. to filter out all 19 Save the file. you change some panels in the system. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. select the bottom layer of panels. select Basic Wall: Generic .15 Zoom in to the cylinder. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 .

10 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 On the Design Bar.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. under Elevations. 6 On the Options Bar. . 9 Select the extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. double-click Exterior. 11 On the Design Bar. click Model Lines. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. 3 In the Project Browser. and click . clear Chain. and on the Options Bar. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.rft. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. 8 On the Design Bar. for Depth. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. select Glass. click Lines. enter 100. click . click Training Files. and click OK. click Finish Sketch.

23 Right-click. All fourth floor panels are selected. click Modify.rfa. and save the family as Curtain Panel . and click Change Walls Orientation. select Curtain Panel . and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. click 25 On the View toolbar. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . under Floor Plans. 19 In the Project Browser. All the panels change to the custom panel you created.rfa family.Pattern. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 21 In the Type Selector.Pattern. click (Default 3D View). and return to the project file.Pattern. 24 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. right-click. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted.14 On the Design Bar.

27 In the Project Browser. select System Panel . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise.Solid. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. 30 Save the file. right-click. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. All fifth floor panels are selected. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel.The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 28 Highlight a panel in the arc. All the panels change to the solid panel. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. under Floor Plans. 29 In the Type Selector. double-click FIFTH FLOOR.

for Profile Usage. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and click OK. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. select Mullion. and enter 50 mm for the radius. click Lines. . except at the GROUND FLOOR level.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. double-click East. For vertical mullions. and select it. enter 8. 8 On the Design Bar. click ■ ■ For Sides. under Elevations. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rft. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. Select Radius. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. click Training Files. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. click Mullion. Click again to specify the ending point. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. 1 In the Project Browser.

and click Visibility. clear Fine. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 19 On the Design Bar.rfa family. After the new profile is loaded. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . 13 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. it can be added as a mullion type. and click OK. 20 Select the detail component. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and return to the project file. click Mullion.detail. click Visibility.rfa. 28 On the View toolbar. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Detail Component. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. and click OK. under 3D Views. click Modify. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. clear Coarse and Medium.11 On the Design Bar. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. click Training Files. 31 Click . 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. click (SteeringWheels). The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view.rfa. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. double-click Southeast Isometric. 27 In the Project Browser. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion.

41 In the Project Browser.32 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. 43 Press DELETE. for Profile. You have placed more mullions than you want. 33 Click Edit/New. 40 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. select All Empty Segments. so you remove the unwanted ones. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . 44 Save the file. 37 Click OK twice. select Circular Mullion for Family. click Modify. and click OK. 38 On the Options Bar. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 36 Under Construction. right-click.

as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. 4 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. All the inside faces highlight. and press TAB. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. TIP To chain select all the walls.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. select Defines slope. and a ruled curtain system. you learned to create a curved curtain system. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and you can click to select them all. make custom curtain panels and mullions. a storefront system. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. click Pick Walls. and then apply those custom elements to the system. double-click TOP OF ROOF. In this lesson. 5 On the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.

14 On the Options Bar. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. Click OK. Sloped Glazings | 549 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Finish Roof. 17 On the View Control Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. 11 On the View Control Bar. 10 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click Roof Properties. select Entire Grid Line. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. enter 600. double-click Southeast Isometric. click Mullion. under 3D Views. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 9 On the Design Bar.7 On the Design Bar. 18 Save the file. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing.

6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. 1 In the Project Browser. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. select Unconnected for Height. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. and enter 2400. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Storefront System In this exercise. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 5 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. double-click GROUND FLOOR. click Wall.

11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. double-click Southeast Isometric. Storefront System | 551 . To see how the grid layout is defined. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. 8 Click the temporary dimension. This specifies an exact length for the wall. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. 9 On the Design Bar. For this wall. even if the wall height changes. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. click Edit/New. under 3D Views. 12 Select the storefront wall. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. which is specified in the type. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. and click . and press ENTER. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. 10 In the Project Browser. enter 10200 mm.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing.

For more information about these curtain wall parameters. under 3D Views. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and Offset. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 16 Click OK.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. Justification. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. or end. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. you find Number. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. see the Revit Architecture help. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select All Empty Segments. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. Angle. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. 19 Select a curtain grid. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. By setting the Angle value. 18 On the Options Bar. center. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. click Mullion. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. enter 15. 20 Save the file. double-click Southeast Isometric.

5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and highlight the model line.3 On the View Control Bar. 6 Click the highlighted line. Curtain System by Lines | 553 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line.

10 Select the panel. Next. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. A panel between the 2 lines is created. 9 On the Design Bar. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. and click . click Modify. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Curtain Grid.8 Select the highlighted line. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. 11 Click OK.

16 In the Type Selector. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . embed a curtain system inside another wall. Finally. quarters.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. and then eighths. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. and define a ruled curtain system. right-click. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. 18 Save the file. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. select System Panel : Solid. quarters. and then eighths.

556 .

In this exercise. and low sloped roofs. In addition. and soffits to the roofs that you create. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. shed. You do not need to create the work plane. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. you learn to create several different types of roofs.Roofs 15 In this lesson. Before you can sketch the roof profile. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. 557 . a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. including hip.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. gable. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. mansard. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. In this lesson. you learn how to add fascia. and open Metric\m_Roofs. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. gutters. click Training Files. In this tutorial.

verify that Section: Section1 is selected. click the blue square on the witness line. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline.1 In the Project Browser. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. 5 In the Go To View dialog. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1. 4 Click OK. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. and so on). click Ref Plane. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. centerline. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . expand Views (all). and click OK. select Name.

Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 . 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2.9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.

14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. select Chain.Next. click Lines. sketch the roof profile. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 13 On the Options Bar. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction.

23 Select one of the breezeway walls. 17 On the Tools toolbar. expand Views (all).Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. press TAB. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. 19 On the Tools toolbar. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. 21 In the Project Browser. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . expand Sections (Type 1). The roof should resemble the following illustration. 18 Select the edge of the roof. and select the second wall. Next. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. press CTRL. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. and then select the exterior face of the wall. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. click Modify. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Section 1. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof.

click Attach for Top/Base. click model.24 On the Options Bar. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. 26 On the View toolbar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof.

m_Roofs. and enter 600 for Overhang. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. sketch the roof footprint. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. and click Yes. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. expand Floor Plans. 3 In the Project Browser. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. Next. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. verify that Defines slope is selected. and double-click Garage Roof. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level.rvt. click Pick Walls.

Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. and on the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. 11 Press CTRL. 8 On the Options Bar. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click the model.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. By default. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. click (Properties). under Dimensions. click Modify. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. clear Defines slope. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. select both slope definition lines. 15 On the View toolbar. 14 When you see the informational dialog. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. click Finish Roof. and click OK. Next.

press TAB. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. expand Views (all). the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. 1 In the Project Browser. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint.rvt. click Pick Walls. and enter 600 for Overhang. and double-click Level 3. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . When you complete the roof. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. clear Defines slope. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney.

click Lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 17 When you see the informational dialog. 9 Using automatic snaps. Next. sketch the chimney opening. click Finish Roof. add new slope lines to the roof. click (Rectangle). 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 13 On the Options Bar. Next.6 Click to select all the walls. 15 On the Options bar. 10 On the View menu. select Defines Slope. 8 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. select Defines Slope. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and double-click Level 2. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.18 On the View toolbar. m_Roofs. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. select Defines slope. expand Floor Plans. and enter 600 for Overhang. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567.

clear Defines Slope. Next. 7 On the Options Bar. using the following illustration for guidance. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Next. 9 On the Tools toolbar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. 10 On the Options Bar. select the left vertical slope definition line. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. and click (Pick Lines). 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. 11 To trim the first line segment. click Lines. click (Trim/Extend). trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. close the roof sketch. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building.

) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. click (SteeringWheels). and click OK. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 16 On the View toolbar. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. click Modify.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. Next. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. 14 Under Constraints. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 17 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 18 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. click Roof Properties. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof.

24 Select the edge of the hip roof. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. join the two remaining walls to the roof. 23 On the Tools toolbar. Next. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time.21 Click (SteeringWheels). and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. click (Join/Unjoin Roof).

Next. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Trim/Extend). You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. 10 To trim the first line segment. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . click Pick Walls. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 2.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. select the left vertical roof line. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Tools toolbar. enter 0 for Overhang. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. expand Views (all). 9 On the Options Bar.rvt. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. 4 On the Options Bar. and enter 300 for Overhang. m_Roofs. 6 On the Options Bar. press TAB. clear Defines Slope. expand Floor Plans. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls.

Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. click Roof Properties. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. and double-click 3D. click Modify. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click 20 On the View toolbar. and click OK. m_Roofs.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and press ENTER. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. Next. you add a slope-defining line. select Defines slope. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof.rvt. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. 16 Under Constraints. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. (SteeringWheels). Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. expand 3D Views. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the View toolbar. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. expand Views (all). enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 13 On the Options Bar.

15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. 7 On the Options Bar. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. Before you can add slope arrows. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. and double-click Level 2. clear Defines Slope. 11 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . Next. To help locate the position of each split. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 3 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. 12 On the Options Bar. 5 On the View menu. 9 On the Tools menu. Next. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Slope Arrow. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. click Split Walls and Lines. 4 In the Project Browser. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. add two new slope arrows. you need to add two reference planes. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. click Ref Plane. verify ■ (Draw) is selected.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. click (Pick Lines). click Modify. and enter 600 for Offset.

m_Roofs. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them.rvt. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. When you sketch a hip roof. and double-click Garage Roof. and then click OK. When eave heights differ.15 to add the second slope arrow. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. 16 Repeat steps 13 . the adjacent eave heights must align. enter 500 for Rise/1000. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. and move the cursor to place the arrow. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. select Slope for Specify. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. click Edit. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 18 Press CTRL. and click 19 Under Constraints. (Properties). Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. select both slope arrows. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 20 Under Dimensions. 1 In the Project Browser.

click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines Slope. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. click Align Eaves. click Save As. under Dimensions. 12 On the Design Bar. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . 10 On the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. Next. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). The eave lines display with a dimension. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. select a method to align the eaves. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 14 If you want to save your changes. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. (Properties). and click OK. When aligning eaves. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. 13 On the View toolbar. click Finish Roof. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 On the Options Bar.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Elevations. click Modify. click Training Files. (Properties). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. 1 In the Project Browser. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Views (all). 3 Select the roof and. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Constraints. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and double-click North. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. on the Options Bar.rvt.

enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. and double-click Level 3. and then select Defines slope. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. expand Views (all). click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 .6 On the View toolbar. and click OK. click . click Lines. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. press TAB. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Pick Lines). Next. under Dimensions. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. click Finish Roof. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 7 In the Project Browser. and select the remaining three lines. 14 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. 10 On the Options Bar.

and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof.17 On the View toolbar. click Save As. click mansard roof. After you add the roof. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. on the File menu. you add a roof to a building shell.rvt. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and save the exercise file with a unique name. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units.

double-click Roof. 5 In the drawing area. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. click Pick Walls. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. verify that Defines slope is not selected. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 .

as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls.Because the walls are not continuous. and click OK. click Roof Properties.EPDM. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . select Steel Truss . 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. 11 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Roof. 7 On the Tools toolbar. for Type.Insulation on Metal Deck . click (Trim/Extend).

double-click the section head to open the section view. In the next steps. 16 On the Options Bar. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. The roof has been created. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. and click to select it. double-click Roof. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. under Floor Plans.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. click (Draw Split Lines).

and select a point on the opposite roof line. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 18 Move the cursor down. 20 Using the same method. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center. move the cursor horizontally to the left.

Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. (Add points). Next. on the Options Bar. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. In this exercise.The roof is now divided into 6 sections. exact placement of the points is not important. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . 23 On the Options Bar. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. You modify the points individually. click (Modify Sub-Elements). you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges.

The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. enter -2''. for the dimension.24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. 25 Using the same method. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. click (Modify Sub-Elements). and press ENTER.

29 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. 31 Select the roof slab. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. click (Properties). for Elevation. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing.27 Press and hold CTRL. including the interior edges of the roof regions. click Modify. and press ENTER. and select all of the roof edges. enter 4''.

you learn how to create roof fascia.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. and Soffits on page 586. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. 37 If you want to save your changes. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Edit. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. and soffits in Revit Architecture. 36 View the results in the section view. Creating Fascia. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. Gutters. Gutters. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. By making the insulation layer variable. After you create a roof. select Variable. In some cases this type of slope is desired. and Soffits In this lesson. The entire slab is sloped. gutters. for the Thermal/Air Layer. gutters. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. you can easily create its fascia. 35 Click OK 3 times. for Structure. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. and soffits. Creating Fascia. click Save As. under Construction. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. click Edit/New.

9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK twice. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. and click Open. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. 5 On the Options Bar. enter Built-up Fascia. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rvt. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Name dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. click Duplicate. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. click (Properties). you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Condominium. 3 Press CTRL. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 .rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. click Training Files. and click OK. under Construction.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 2 On the Options Bar. Creating Gutters on page 588. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs .rvt. c_Condominium.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 13 On the Design Bar. Creating Gutters In this exercise. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. click (Properties).

select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. click Edit/New. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. click Duplicate. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. Creating Soffits on page 590. and click OK. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 Click to place the gutter. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value field for Material. under Construction. and click OK three times. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. Creating Gutters | 589 . .3 In the Properties dialog. 7 Under Materials and Finishes.

click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . c_Condominium. you learn how to place a roof soffit. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Design Bar.rvt. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Roofs. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Creating Soffits In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Roof.

expand 3D Views. 7 On the Tools menu. expand Views (all). 8 Select the roof. click Finish Sketch. Creating Soffits | 591 . and double-click 3D. 6 In the Project Browser. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 5 On the Design Bar.4 Select the roof. and then select the soffit to join them. click Join Geometry.

on the File menu. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.9 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

your values will be different. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. 3 Under Area. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. In the final exercise. and open Common\c_Area. select Square meters. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. 2 In the Project Units dialog. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. click Training Files. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. Click OK. under Length. If you are using metric units. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Finally. For Unit Suffix. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Millimeters. select mm. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. 593 . click Project Units. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click the Room Calculations tab. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. 9 Click Cancel. and click Room and Area. right-click in the Design Bar. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. expand Views (all). the system-computed height defaults to the level. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. click OK. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible.■ ■ ■ For Rounding. These schemes define spatial relationships. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. or 0. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. click the Area Schemes tab. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. Click OK. it is not necessary in this exercise. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . expand Floor Plans. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. select 2 decimal places. select m2. 4 In the Project Units dialog. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. click Settings. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. For Unit Suffix.

An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). Click OK. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. click Area. under Views (all). rather than the area tag. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas.Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. click Area Plan. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. 12 When the informational dialog displays. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. you must select one of the reference lines. When you select Yes in this dialog. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. If you select No. 13 In the Project Browser. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. you must manually add these boundary lines. forming a closed loop. To modify the area.

verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. Click OK. If you do not select this option. Next. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. you can either draw them or pick them. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. you create a new area plan for rentable space. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. 21 On the Options Bar. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. When you add area boundary lines. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . click Area Plan. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. and store area. When you pick the walls. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. common areas. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. click Area Boundary.

25 On the Design Bar. and click to select the area. 27 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ . NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model.23 On the Design Bar. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. Select Office area for Area Type. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. click Area.

In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. 31 On the Design Bar. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. 32 On the Options Bar. click Modify and select the area. 29 On the Design Bar. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. Select Office area for Area Type. click ■ ■ ■ . 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . click Area. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. 33 In the Element Properties dialog.■ Click OK.

Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. 35 Add an area to the building model core. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4.■ Click OK. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. and select Store Area for Area Type. enter Core for Name. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model.

the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. name the project Area-in progress.rvt. click Color Scheme Legend. and click to place the legend. 37 On the File menu. In this exercise.Notice that within the two store areas. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click Save. In the next exercise. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . and click Save.

click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. click the Fields tab. under Category. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. select Area Type and click Add. select Areas (Rentable). click Schedule/Quantities. 7 Under Available fields. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog.3 When the dialog displays. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.

The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.9 Click OK. 602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .

you then need to update the building face. floor. At any time. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. or both. you can specify the view to display massing elements. and floors. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. In this tutorial. floors. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. 603 . volume. If you modify a massing face. curtain systems. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. roofs. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. After creating mass floors.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. and perimeter information. You assign the default wall. building elements. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. and roofs. After you make building elements. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls.

and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. and click Massing.rvt. under Views (all). click Create Mass. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. sweeps. and cutting geometry. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. under Floor Plans. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. click Training Files. 5 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing .

and click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. and on the Options Bar. under Views (all). click Finish Sketch. and click OK. click Lines. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. select Mass (Opaque). for Offset. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. under Constraints. click the value for Material. for Extrusion End. and on the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. click 18 On the Options Bar. (Line). 15 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Materials and Finishes. 13 On the View toolbar. enter 1550 mm. (Pick Lines). enter 25000. double-click Level 1. 8 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). and click . TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Materials dialog. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . 16 On the Design Bar. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. under Floor Plans. for Name. click Lines. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.

and click . select Pick a plane. and click OK. 21 On the Design Bar. TIP If necessary. under Materials and Finishes. under Constraints. for Extrusion Start. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 22 In the Element Properties dialog. under Views (all). highlight the larger form. 26 In the Project Browser. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . for Extrusion End. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. The second form is on top of the first form. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. 23 In the Materials dialog. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. and click OK. double-click West. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 In the drawing area. 28 On the Design Bar. click the value for Material. under Views (all). for Name. double-click {3D} to see the results. and click OK. click Extrusion Properties. click Finish Sketch.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. press TAB to highlight the entire face. select Mass (Transparent). enter 27500. 25 On the Design Bar. enter 25000.

and clear Chain. click (Draw). The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. 34 On the Options Bar. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. click (Arc passing through three points). and click to select the line start point. click Lines. Next. (Pick Lines). and on the Options Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . 37 On the Options Bar. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc.31 Click to select the face. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown.

41 On the Edit toolbar. click Modify. on the Options Bar.TIP If you do not see this option. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Views (all). and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. click the arrow next to the drawing options. (Line). Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and delete the vertical construction line. 39 On the Design Bar. click Edit Top. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 46 On the Design Bar. double-click East. 45 In the Project Browser. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. click (Move). 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. click Lines and.

and that -92000 is specified for Second End. for Material. In the next exercise. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. click Finish Sketch. 52 On the Design Bar. (Arc passing through three points).48 On the Options Bar. 53 On the View toolbar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. click 49 Create an arc as shown. 50 On the Design Bar. In this exercise. click Blend Properties. and click OK. click (Default 3D View). 51 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected.

under Floor Plans. click Lines. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. 10 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset.rvt. m_Massing_Start. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. double-click Level 1. 2 In the drawing area. as shown. and select Chain. under Views (all). 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. 9 On the Design Bar. 7 Using the same technique. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. click (Line). 4 On the Options bar. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select the mass. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane.

click Finish Sketch. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. on the View Control Bar. click (Default 3D View). enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. 17 On the View toolbar. 15 Click OK. snap the corners to the intersections. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. 14 Under Constraints. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. Using Swept Blends | 611 . 13 On the Design Bar. In this exercise. When sketching each extrusion. 16 On the Design Bar. for Extrusion End.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. click Extrusion Properties. enter 0. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises.

3 On the Design Bar. select a point below the mass elements. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. under Floor Plans. click Sketch 2D Path. m_Massing_Start. and click Lines.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. 4 On the Options Bar. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. ■ For the radius.

11 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 9 On the Options Bar. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. Using Swept Blends | 613 . Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. and click Edit. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. click (Rectangle). as shown. 10 On the Design Bar. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. click Finish Path. click Profile 1.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. click (Default 3D View). verify that <By Sketch> is selected. 8 On the Design Bar. The only way to align these elements is visually.

sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. click Finish Profile. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . click (Align). Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. 17 Using the same method. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. click Profile 2. and press ESC. 15 On the Design Bar. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass.13 On the Tools toolbar.

Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. 23 On the Design Bar.18 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Materials dialog. click <By Category>. 22 Click OK twice. click Finish Profile. click Swept Blend Properties. and click . select Mass (Transparent). click Finish Swept Blend. Using Swept Blends | 615 . 20 In the Element Properties dialog.

click Finish Mass. you create new family types from a mass family file. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing .rvt. In this exercise. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. Finally.24 On the Design Bar. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise.

enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. and for Name. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . for Depth. 3 In the Name dialog. 7 Click New. enter 68000 mm. click New. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. In this exercise. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. and click OK. under Other. click Training Files. enter 11000 mm. enter 18000 mm. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Family Types dialog. for Width. enter 46000mm. 6 For Width. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. enter 9000 mm. for Depth. for Height.rfa. 8 For Width. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. and click Apply. enter 15000mm. and click OK. click Family Types. and click Apply. and for Name. and click Apply. and click OK. enter 12000 mm. enter 18000 mm. 5 Click New. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Depth. for Height. 9 Click OK. for Height. enter 6000 mm.rfa.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

618 | Chapter 17 Massing . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place.rfa. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. 2 In the Project Browser. 6 Open the Box-Training. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. click Place Mass. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Arc Dome. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa family files. as shown. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.rfa. Semi Barrel Vault. 3 On the View Control Bar. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 1 If not already selected. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. under Views (all). 8 In the Type Selector. on the View toolbar. click Training Files. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. (Show Mass) to show the massing model.rfa. double-click Site. and Triangle. You also load other existing mass families and place them. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model.rvt.

click (Element Properties). 14 In the Type Selector. and click OK twice. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. specify Mass (Transparent). select the triangle. and click OK twice. 17 Press CTRL. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. click Place Mass. 25 In the drawing area.10 On the Design Bar. click Place Mass. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. and click (Element Properties). click Modify. 24 On the Design Bar. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . select Rotate after placement. click Modify. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. and click to place the mass. for the Material parameter. enter 90 for Angle. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. for the Material parameter. 21 On the Options Bar. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. specify Mass (Opaque). select the 3 boxes. 11 Select the box. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 23 On the Options Bar. as shown. 20 In the Type Selector.

select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . for the Material parameter. specify Mass (Opaque). 29 In the Type Selector. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). for the Material parameter. click (Default 3D View). and click OK twice. click Place Mass.26 Select the triangle. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). specify Mass (Transparent). 33 On the View toolbar. and click OK twice.

(Join Geometry). In the next exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. click (Default 3D View).Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model.rvt file. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . you join these mass elements. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. In this exercise. NOTE When you join geometry.

Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. under Floor Plans. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. under Views (all).3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. 4 Select the triangle. double-click Site. click (Mirror). on the Edit toolbar. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing .

Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. (Join Geometry). for Axis. 17 Press ESC to see the result. click (Default 3D View).8 On the Options Bar. as shown. Joining Mass Elements | 623 . enter SM. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. and then select the triangle. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. click (Draw). 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. and snap to the midpoint of the edge.

1 On the Design Bar. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. and select the triangle mass element. click (Add to Design Option Set). Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. do not clear the check mark.In this exercise. (If Design Options is already selected.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar.rvt. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. 2 On the Window menu. you joined mass elements together. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. click Modify.

select Rotate after placement. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . 10 On the Options Bar. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. click Place Mass. 14 In the drawing area.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. clear Curved. select Sloped (primary). TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. and click OK twice. for Angle. 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. click Place Mass. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. under Views (all). click Modify. 8 On the Options Bar. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 17 In the Type Selector. and click (Element Properties). specify Mass (Transparent). for the Material parameter. and click OK. enter 90. 13 On the Design Bar.

24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. double-click North. 22 In the Project Browser. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. While pressing CTRL. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. TIP To find the correct shapes. 23 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. select Curved. under Views (all). 19 On the Design Bar. and watch the status bar. and click (Element Properties). select the three arc domes. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 20 In the drawing area. 28 In the Project Browser. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing .TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. specify Mass (Transparent). Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. under Views (all). under Elevations. click (Add to Design Option Set). double-click {3D}. for the Material parameter. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. and click OK twice. and click OK. under 3D Views. clear Sloped. 26 On the Design Options toolbar.

you placed mass elements into Design Options.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 31 Click the value for Design Option. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. click (Design Options). 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. In this exercise. under Option. click the Design Options tab. 35 On the File menu. you can make it the primary option. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . and click Close. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design.rvt. 34 Close the warning that displays. and click OK. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. 33 In the Design Options dialog. select Curved and. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. select Curved from the Design Option menu. click Make Primary.

rvt. and for Loc Line. click (Pick Faces). Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the View toolbar. double-click {3D}. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. under Views (all). 5 In the Type Selector. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing .Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. you pick massing faces to create walls. 6 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. click Wall by Face.Brick on CMU. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. select Basic Wall: Exterior . select Wall Centerline.

13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. 9 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. under Views (all). 8 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. under Views (all). ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). 16 In the Type Selector. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. under Floor Plans. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 11 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. double-click Level 5. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . double-click Level 3. 14 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 12 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. 15 On the Design Bar.

double-click Level 9. 19 In the Project Browser. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. 20 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar.18 Select all the faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. 21 On the Design Bar. If desired.

Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.In this exercise. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. under Views (all). Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. double-click {3D}. select all levels. 8 On the Design Bar. and exterior surface area. volume. 3 On the Model Categories tab. and click OK. When you select levels. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. clear Curtain Panels. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 Click OK. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. Curtain Systems. click Modify. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. and Walls.rvt. perimeter. click Mass Floors. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . 1 In the Project Browser.

12 In the Mass Floors dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. click Mass Floors. 13 On the Design Bar. select Levels 1-4. 10 Press CTRL.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. click Modify. and click OK. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing .

Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . 15 Press CTRL. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. select Level 1. 16 On the Options Bar. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. click Mass Floors. and click OK.14 On the Options Bar.

and click Add. under Category. 2 In the New Schedule dialog.rvt. and select Level. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. select Mass Floor. and click OK.In this exercise. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. 4 Using the same method. under Available fields. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . select Floor Area. Floor Perimeter. The Floor Area. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. schedules can be created using the mass floors. press and hold SHIFT. Floor Volume. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. select Mass: Family and Type. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. for Sort by. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. for Usage. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. and click OK. enter Retail.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. select Mass: Family and Type. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . expand Schedules/Quantities. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. 14 Select Level. 13 With Usage selected. and click Properties. for Fields. and click Remove. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. under Scheduled fields (in order). After you assign usage. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. under Other. click Move Up until Usage is listed first.

for Filter by. under Other. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. and click OK. for Then by. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. in the field under Filter by. 18 On the Filter tab. select Level. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Usage. enter Hotel. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. elevation. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. 22 In the Project Browser. select Calculate totals.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Filter. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for Sort by. under Other. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Grand totals. click Edit. for Field formatting. 16 On the Formatting tab. and click OK. and click Rename. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). select Usage. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. 19 Click OK twice. and click Properties. for Filter. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. under Fields. click Edit. select Floor Area. 23 In the Rename View dialog. 24 In the Project Browser. 27 Click OK twice. and in the field below. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. and plan views.

floor perimeter. you pick massing faces to create roofs. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. double-click {3D}. under Views (all). you created mass floor schedules. The mass floor schedules list. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown.In this exercise. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . by level.rvt. the floor area. click Roof by Face. 1 In the Project Browser.

This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. click Create Roof. click Create Roof. 5 On the Options Bar. Your model should now look as shown. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 .4 In the Type Selector. select Basic Roof : Generic . 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.400mm.

14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. In this exercise. 12 On the Options Bar. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. Curtain Systems. select Curtain Panels. select Sloped Glazing. and Walls. 13 Using the same method. in the Type Selector. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element.8 Using the method you just learned. click Create Roof. and click OK. 15 Click the Model Categories tab.

1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. click Curtain System by Face.rvt. 5 Press CTRL. verify that Select Multiple is selected. double-click {3D}. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. click Create System. 3 In the Type Selector. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. under Views (all). 4 On the Options Bar. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 .

8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. select the blended form on the in-place mass.7 Using the same method. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing . create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes.

click Create System. 11 Using the same method. Creating Curtain Systems | 643 .9 On the Options Bar. create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.

In this exercise.rvt. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing . you change the size of an existing mass family. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family.12 Click Modify to exit the command. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces.

for Width. double-click Site. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . Floors. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and Walls. Curtain Systems. 3 On the Model Categories tab. under Floor Plans. clear Exclude Design Options. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. click Modify. and then click OK. 2 On the View menu. 7 On the Options Bar. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. click Visibility/Graphics. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. Roofs. under Views (all). clear Curtain Panels. and click OK.1 In the Project Browser. and click (Element Properties). enter 30000. 6 On the Design Bar. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. Next.

12 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all). 11 In the Project Browser. In the next steps. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. double-click Level 1. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing .10 Open the 3D view to see the result. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. under Floor Plans. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.

press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. 17 Select the roof as shown. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. click (Default 3D View). click OK.TIP To select the curtain wall. click Remake. Also. 16 On the View toolbar. 14 On the Options Bar. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. you want to select the smaller one.

19 Select the arc dome curtain system. click Remake.18 On the Options Bar. and click Remake. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing .

click (Show Mass) to turn off massing.20 In the Project Browser.rvt. 1 Open the 3D view. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. In this exercise. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. you changed the size of an existing mass family. under Schedules/Quantities.

650 | Chapter 17 Massing . 7 Clear one of the check boxes. right-click {3D}. 9 Select Mass. 6 On the Model Categories tab. 4 Rename the view 3D . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under 3D Views. 3 In the Project Browser. 8 Click None to clear the selection.Massing only. and click OK. click All to select all categories. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.The 3D view now shows only the building shell.

you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 . This concludes the massing tutorial. You might create the model shown.In this exercise. If desired. to the building shell. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. such as columns and an extruded roof.

652 .

This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. When you make changes to a nested group. By grouping objects. In another exercise. In this exercise. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. You can also nest groups within other groups. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. and typical office layouts. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. all instances in the building model are updated. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. place. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. or with those working on a different project. you not only simplify their placement. The new group is considered nested within the host group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. You mirror one instance of the group. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. hotel rooms. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. Modifying. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. 653 . Creating. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. and modify repetitive units. you also simplify the modification process. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. After you create a model group. the host group is also updated automatically. you add the new model group to a previously created group. For example. In this tutorial.

enter ZR. and double-click First Floor.rvt. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. 2 Click in the drawing area. click Training Files. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser.

3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. 4 On the Edit toolbar. click (Group). Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . enter Typical Kitchen. and click OK. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity.

select the center control for the group origin. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen.

click Modify. expand Model. under Groups. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. 12 On the Design Bar. right-click Typical Kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . and click Create Instance. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group.

The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping . NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. clear Copy. 15 On the Options Bar. click (Mirror). select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.14 On the Edit toolbar.

click (Rotate).17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 . and on the Edit toolbar.

select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 20 On the Design Bar. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. as shown. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping .NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. click Modify. and one rotated. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. one mirrored.

rvt. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. and click Save. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. click Save As. When you finish editing. you make changes to an instance of a group. Modifying a Group | 661 . 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. and click to select it. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. press TAB to highlight the wall. Modifying a Group In this exercise.

6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 8 On the Design Bar.3 Click (Group Member. and click to select the door. press TAB. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. 4 Move the cursor over the door. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click to select the wall. and click member to group instance.). click Modify. 7 Click (Group Member. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.).). press TAB. select the element. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance.). NOTE To display an excluded element.

clear Tag on Placement. click Wall. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. click Door. 15 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. move the cursor to the left. 10 In the Type Selector. click Modify.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Modifying a Group | 663 .127mm. select Basic Wall : Generic . 14 In the Type Selector.

The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner.17 On the Design Bar. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 23 In the drawing area. move the cursor up. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Modify. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. All other elements in the model are grayed out. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. In edit group mode. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Edit Group.

27 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. which acts as the host. under Constraints. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. click Modify.25 On the Design Bar. enter 1000. and click OK. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. for Unconnected Height. click Finish. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. you add the Typical Kitchen group. Nesting Groups | 665 . When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. and on the Options Bar. Nesting Groups In this exercise. click 28 For Base Offset. (Element Properties). enter 2134. 26 Select the opening. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. 29 On the group editor toolbar. created in an earlier lesson.

5 In the drawing area.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. double-click First Floor. under Floor Plans. in the Project Browser. click (Add to Group). m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. select the Typical Kitchen group. 4 On the group editor toolbar. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Edit Group.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary.

Nesting Groups | 667 . under Floor Plans.6 Press TAB. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. select the wall between the folding doors. 7 On the group editor toolbar. double-click Second Floor. and each of the bifold doors. click Finish. 8 In the Project Browser.

double-click First Floor. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. and filled regions. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. such as text. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. In the next exercise. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation.rvt. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. such as door and window tags. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. you add door tags to a group. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

click to draw a rectangular region. and select a point below the left elevator. click Finish Sketch. 4 On the Options Bar. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Filled Region. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. 7 On the Design Bar.

670 | Chapter 18 Grouping .Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 9 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Edit toolbar. as shown. click Modify. click Text. and click OK. click to add an arc leader. click (Group). 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. and on the Design Bar. and select the text note and the filled region. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 16 In the drawing area. 12 Enter Tile. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft.

22 On the Design Bar. expand Detail. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile.18 On the Design Bar. under Groups. double-click Second Floor. Because the detail group contains variables. 20 In the Project Browser. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. under Floor Plans. click Modify. and click Create Instance. 21 In the drawing area. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.

Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. double-click First Floor. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. as shown. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. under Floor Plans.rvt. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. click Modify. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. clear Leader. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group.manner that a drawing component can be added. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 5 On the Design Bar.

enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. click (Group). select Door Tags. double-click Second Floor. click Check None. 8 In the Filter dialog. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. for Attached Detail Group Name. and click OK. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . under Floor Plans. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser.7 On the Options Bar. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. 9 On the Edit toolbar. 11 In the Project Browser. click (Filter Selection). and click OK. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog.

17 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 On the Options Bar. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. click Place Detail. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. and click OK.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. click Modify. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. therefore. When you load the group from the library into a new project. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 16 On the Design Bar. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson.

13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. verify that Project is selected. and click Open. click Desktop. accept the default template file. expand Groups. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. and click OK. browse to the Desktop. select 2 Bedroom Unit.rvt. for Create new. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. click Modify. verify that Same as group name is selected. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and expand Model. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 3 For File name. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. under Groups\Model. click OK. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . A warning dialog displays. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT).rvt. and click Create Instance. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 5 In the New Project dialog. In this case. and click Save Group. 12 On the Design Bar. and click Save.

You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. 24 In the message dialog. click Link. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. and the link is removed. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. expand Revit Links. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog.rvt file is added as a link to the project. click Bind. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. When a group is converted to a link. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Training Files.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. click Use Existing. and click OK. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 17 On the Design Bar.rvt. click Modify. click Remove Link. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 23 In the confirmation dialog. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click OK. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Attached Details is selected only. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and on the Options Bar. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. select the linked Revit model. 18 In the Project Browser.

you add a building pad to the site. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. convert the data to a table. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. islands. You add property lines manually. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. and then modify the data. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. and walkways.Site 19 In this tutorial. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. 677 . Using Site Tools In this lesson. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. In the final exercises.

click Training Files. In the second part of this exercise. expand Views (all). This project file was created using the default metric template. expand Floor Plans.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. and double-click Site. and click Site. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. and open Metric\m_First_Project. 3 On the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click in the Design Bar. click Point. 4 On the Options Bar. 678 | Chapter 19 Site . The scale of this view is 1 : 100. click Toposurface. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. Using the first method. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. you create a toposurface using two different methods.

Use the following illustration as a reference. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. Creating a Toposurface | 679 .5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point.

click Finish Surface.8 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Settings menu. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. enter 1500mm. and 18000mm absolute elevations. and click OK. under Increment. 15000mm. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. Use the following illustration as a reference. under Additional Contours. 11 On the Design Bar. 12000mm. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . click Site Settings.

click to view it at various angles. Before importing the contour data. and press ENTER. 19 On the Design Bar. 14 On the View toolbar. modify the level names and elevations. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. 18 In the Project Browser. click the elevation value. enter 1000mm. on the Standard toolbar. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. 15 On the View Control Bar. (SteeringWheels). click (Default 3D View). click Modify. 16 On the View toolbar. and double-click South. under Views (all). click to delete it.

Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder.21 Click the Level 2 text. select Specify. select Preserve. it is considered an import symbol. 24 In the Project Browser. Click Open. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. 29 Select the imported topography. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. and click OK. For Layers. Until it is exploded. click Modify. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. For Colors. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. click Yes. 23 Click the Level 1 text. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. 28 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Pin Position. rename the level Basement. double-click Site. rename the level Base Site Elevation. and press ENTER. 30 On the Edit menu. click Training Files. Verify that Current view only is not selected. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved.

31 On the Design Bar. and then click OK. select it. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. clear C_INDX. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. When you select the import symbol. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 32 On the View menu. when the edges highlight. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. click Toposurface. clear Elevations. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. 36 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. click the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. click Modify. 34 Under Visibility.

and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click (Default 3D View). 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Save. Using the second method. click Finish Surface. this project file is required in its current state. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. Using the first method. click (SteeringWheels). you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. 42 On the View toolbar. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. name the project Site-in progress. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . 40 On the View toolbar. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor.rvt. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. Adding Property Lines on page 684. you add property lines using two methods.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. 39 On the Design Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.

If you have not completed the previous exercise. Adding Property Lines | 685 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Click Modify. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. On the Design Bar. double-click Site. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. Site-in progress. click Lines. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. do so before continuing.rvt. select Create property lines by sketching. click Lines. 4 On the Design Bar. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. and click OK. Select and delete the right vertical line. click Property Line. Although you can use your preferred sketching method.

add an arc line on the right.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. to delete them. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. click Property Line. 9 In the warning dialog. select the lines. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. A warning dialog is displayed. 8 On the Options Bar. select Edit Table. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. on the Standard toolbar. click OK. 6 On the Design Bar. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. click OK. when they highlight. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. click 12 On the Design Bar.

click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. 19 In the Tags dialog. This means there is no gap in the property lines. 15 Starting in Row #1. Adding Property Lines | 687 .14 In the Property Lines dialog. click to place the property lines. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. 16 Click OK. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. If the gap is not closed.

26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. click Training Files. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. click the Imported Categories tab. 25 Under Visibility. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data.rfa. 30 On the View Control Bar. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . The tags display more prominently in this view.20 Click Load. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. 27 On the Options Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. this project file is required in its current state. 23 On the View menu. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. In the next exercise. 22 In the Tags dialog. and click Drafting. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. clear Leader. right-click in the Design Bar. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. click to place it. you created two sets of property lines. Before adding property line segment tags. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. In the final step. click Tag ➤ By Category.dwg and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK.

10 Under Additional Contours. select Dash dot. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. 7 Click OK. Under Range Type. select Single Value. Under Line Pattern. In the Object Styles dialog. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. under Contour Line Display. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. Under Line Color. enter the name Working Contour. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. 2 On the Settings menu. Under Subcategory. select a shade of Brown. enter 1000. and click OK. 4 Under Modify Subcategories.rvt. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . click Object Styles.0mm. click Site Settings. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. select Working Contour. select Topography. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. click New. for Subcategory. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. Site-in progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography.

Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. you create subregions in order to define roads. such as material. In this exercise. The next exercise requires a new training file. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. and islands. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. you create topographic subregions to define roads. The object style subcategory. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . parking areas. and islands. parking areas. Working Contour. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. In the next exercise.11 Click OK.

use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. try to replicate the location and proportion. and open Metric\m_Site. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 . click Subregion. Although the exact dimensions are not important. click Training Files. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. click Lines. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the Design Bar.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography.Tarmacadam for Name. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. When you finish the sketch in a later step. click Finish Sketch. under Materials and Finishes. click the value for Material. click Properties. 6 In the Materials dialog. enter Parking for Name. select Site . 692 | Chapter 19 Site .NOTE In the Metric training file. 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. under Identity Data. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. and click to open the Materials dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.

This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. expand Schedules/Quantities. 14 On the Options Bar. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. 12 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . and double-click Topography Schedule.Tarmacadam. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. they display within this schedule. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. click Edit Boundary. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. As you create new subregions.9 On the View Control Bar.

Within each subregion. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. Delete overlapping lines. Notice that the project area has increased. In this training project. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . 17 On the View Control Bar. double-click Topography Schedule. click Subregion. 18 In the Project Browser. click Lines. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. 20 On the View Control Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. click Finish Sketch. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. 22 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area.

25 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 On the Design Bar. and click to open the Materials dialog. click the value for Material. 29 On the View Control Bar. 24 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data. 30 In the Project Browser. double-click Topography Schedule. click Properties.Grass for Name. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. 26 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 . select Site . Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Finish Sketch. enter Island . under Schedules/Quantities.Grass for Name. and click OK.23 In the upper-right parking area. and click OK.

walkway. double-click Site. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. You must sketch each region separately. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. 32 In the Project Browser. Name each region Island Grass. double-click Topography Schedule. 34 On the Design Bar. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. Name the subregion Walkway. Notice that the schedule has been updated. under Schedules/Quantities. click Subregion. under Floor Plans. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ .31 In the Project Browser. and apply the material Site . Using the techniques learned in previous steps. 35 On the Design Bar.Grass. double-click Site. click Lines. under Floor Plans.

Notice that the schedule has been updated. click Finish Sketch. under Schedules/Quantities. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. double-click Topography Schedule. there is still only one toposurface. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . 37 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Project Browser. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion.

double-click Site. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. Site tutorial-in progress. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and click Save. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. When you use the grading tool.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points.rvt. 2 Select the toposurface. under Floor Plans. this project file is required in its current state.rvt. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. 698 | Chapter 19 Site .

and click Select and Edit. select Copy Internal Points. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . and click OK. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Select the topographic surface. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. Using Phasing on page 761. click Graded Region.3 On the Options Bar. select Existing for Phase Created. under Phasing. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. see the tutorial. A warning dialog is displayed. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. click (Element Properties). 7 In the Graded Region dialog. click Modify.

Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. 10 Press DELETE. 700 | Chapter 19 Site .

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. demolished. and new. 11 On the View Control Bar.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. Grading the Toposurface | 701 . 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.

16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 15 On the Options Bar. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar. click Point. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. 18 On the View toolbar.13 Press DELETE. click (Default 3D View). 702 | Chapter 19 Site . click Finish Surface. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm.

This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. specify Existing for Phase. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. and click OK. (SteeringWheels). under Phasing. under Phasing. Therefore. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. click View Properties. and click OK. this project file is required in its current state. click View Properties. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 Select the toposurface. only the original toposurface displays. click to view it at various angles. When you add a building pad. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . 27 Proceed to the next exercise. specify New Construction for Phase. and delete it. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. you can delete it. 24 On the View menu. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. you create a building pad. Only the graded topography displays.20 On the View toolbar.

click Lines. 2 On the View Control Bar. Site tutorial-in progress. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . If you have an existing building model. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. click Finish Sketch. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE By default. double-click Site. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. the Pick Walls command is active. click Pad. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.rvt. under Floor Plans. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad.

see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . click (SteeringWheels). 8 On the View toolbar. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Adding Site Components on page 706.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. 7 On the View Control Bar. Notice the new building pad. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. this project file is required in its current state. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 9 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. double-click Site. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area.Adding Site Components In this exercise. under Floor Plans. 706 | Chapter 19 Site . and select the parking space. click Modify. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area.90 deg. Site tutorial-in progress. click Parking Component. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . 3 In the Type Selector. you add parking and planting components to the site surface.

TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task.NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. 8 On the View toolbar. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. Adding Site Components | 707 . 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. click (Default 3D View).

9 On the View toolbar. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click (SteeringWheels). choose any tree type. Notice the new parking spaces. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Site Component. double-click Site. 12 In the Type Selector. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.

15 On the View toolbar. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. click (Default 3D View). 14 On the View toolbar. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. Adding Site Components | 709 . and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. In the following illustration.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. click (SteeringWheels). 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Site tutorial-in progress. double-click Site.rvt. click Tag All Not Tagged. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. under Floor Plans. and click OK. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. and click Apply. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the View menu. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. click Hidden Line. this project file is required in its current state. click Apply. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. to position the shoulder of the leader. 8 On the Options Bar. In the following exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. as shown: 10 Using the same method. Click up and to the left. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. outside of the site. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. Click again to the left to position the leader.

13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. click Modify. and select the 3 spot dimensions. 712 | Chapter 19 Site .■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. 12 Press and hold CTRL. 11 On the Design Bar.

■ Clear Leader. you create a parking schedule. click Modify. 14 On the Design Bar. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713.

9 On the Window menu. select Mark. enter Size. number the first three spaces consecutively. and click OK. and click OK. select Parking for Category. If necessary. under Floor Plans. 13 In the Parking Schedule. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Close Hidden Windows. select Type. 4 Under Available fields. click Schedule/Quantities. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. enter Space. 7 Under Fields. click the Fields tab. and click Add. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. Site tutorial-in progress. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The parking schedule is displayed.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click Site. and click Add. under Space. select Mark. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. and under Heading. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. 6 Click the Formatting tab. 5 Under Available fields. 12 In the Site plan. 10 In the Project Browser.rvt. select Type. and under Heading. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . click Tile. 11 On the Window menu. under Views (all). 8 Under Fields. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges.

This allows you to know which space you are numbering.Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. under Space. finish numbering the remaining spaces. 14 In the Parking Schedule. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 . the selected space highlights in the Site plan.

716 .

you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. Working in a shared project In a shared project. and click Editable. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. called Worksharing. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. In this tutorial. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. A workset is a collection of building elements. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. however. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. doors. To make a workset editable. All other team members can view this workset. select the desired workset. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 . When you are working on a shared project. you specify an active workset. The first time you activate worksets within a project. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. stairs. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. they cannot make changes to it. use Element Borrowing. You can enable Worksharing for any project. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. you can select which worksets are open or closed. This prevents possible conflicts within the project.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. Using Worksharing. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. and so on. you must first enable Worksharing. go to the Worksets dialog. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. floors. such as walls. Elements specific to a view. After the project is shared. such as annotations and dimensions. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view.

You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. In most projects. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance.dialog. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. You should have at least one workset for each person. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. for a typical project. In the next exercise. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. Instead. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. After learning the fundamentals. and View worksets. In the lessons and exercises that follow. such as a tenant interior. Experience has shown that. When setting up Worksharing. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. Shared Levels and Grids. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. not including the Project Standards. In a multi-story structure. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users.

the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. When creating the new worksets. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. For example. with each assigned a specific functional task. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. each team member has control over a portion of the design. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. if a workset named Interior was created. When you create a new workset. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing.Team member roles Typically. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. designers work in teams. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. On this tab. Regardless of the default setting. As new members create worksets for their own use. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access.

You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest.Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. you can select which workset is active. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. When you save locally (to your local file). it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. your changes are saved. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. you should then save to your local file. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. After saving to the central file. However. Generally. you make that workset editable by you. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. however. within the local file. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. On the Options Bar. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. When you save to the central file.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. When finished or at regular intervals. As you work. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. your changes propagate to the entire team. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. This makes them available to other team members. Therefore. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. the file is saved as the central file. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. When you save to the central file. proceeds as usual. This is called “Selective Open. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time.

you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. reload the latest changes from the central file. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. if you know who checked out the required workset. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. In this instance. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. In this conceptual exercise. To do this. you should check out the Materials workset. save to the central file. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. and make that workset editable. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. for instance. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. make any required worksets editable. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. Alternatively. When working remotely. In the next exercise. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. and then save the local file. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. In this situation. you work no differently then you would in the office. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. using VPN.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work.

TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. under Show. When you enable worksharing.Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing.rvt. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Worksets. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects ." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Worksets. The Worksets dialog displays. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. click Training Files. 3 In the Worksets dialog. and notice all are editable by you. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. Your username displays as the present owner.

In this simple training project. In this case. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. 12 Click Rename. In this training file. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. clear Visible by default in all views. another is assigned the interior layout. When you initially activate Worksharing. 8 Click OK. 17 On the Options Bar. clear Families. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. click OK. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. Therefore. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. 11 In the Worksets dialog. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. click New. type the name Exterior Shell. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model.■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. currently named Workset1. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. select Workset1. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. under Identity Data. Because the interior walls appear in many views. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. Only User-Created worksets should display. Project Standards. 16 In the drawing area. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. expand Views (all). select any of the exterior walls of the building model. 9 Click New. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. and Views. For example. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. 13 In the Rename dialog. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. You do. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. it is better to make them visible by default. a small number of team members are working on the building model. imagine four users including yourself. you can rename the default workset. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Floor Plans. 14 In the Worksets dialog. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. and click OK. however. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". ■ 5 Under Show. click . This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. For training purposes. and double-click Level 1.

24 On the Options Bar. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. select Interior Layout for Workset. and walls. under Identity Data. 21 On the Options Bar. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. stairs. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. and click OK. including the interior doors. select Interior Layout for Workset. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 23 Select all of the interior elements. 20 Select one of the interior walls. click . Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. click . 25 In the Element Properties dialog. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. under Identity Data. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 29 Click OK. 26 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. 22 In the Element Properties dialog.19 Click OK. and click OK. click the Worksets tab.

You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. Now that you have created the central file. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. double-click Level 2. 42 On the right side of the dialog. click Non Editable. 43 Click OK. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. click Worksets. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. 38 In the Save As dialog. In this exercise. you enabled Worksharing on a project. 34 In the drawing area. click . Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. click the Worksets tab. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. 32 Select Interior Layout. 30 On the View menu. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. click Save As. 35 On the Options Bar. select Interior Layout for Workset. 39 Click Save. make sure you remember the location of this central file. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. 41 In the Worksets dialog. If any interior elements remain. under Views (all). select all of the interior elements of the building model. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. 44 On the File menu. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. 33 In the Project Browser. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. click Close. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. under Identity Data. Create the central file 37 On the File menu.

you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. select Interior Layout for Name. click Worksets. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. make modifications to the building model. select Interior Layout. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. select the central file. and select Specify. and click Save. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. In this case. you create your local file. expand Views (all). and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. 2 In the Open dialog. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 15 In the Project Browser. If you have not yet completed the exercise. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. and select Yes for Editable. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. click Save As. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 7 In the Save As dialog. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. 13 On the Window menu. and click OK. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. please do so before continuing. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. 6 On the File menu. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. Next. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 12 Click OK. check out worksets. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. click Open. 4 Click Open. In addition. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. click Options. select all the User-Created worksets. and click OK. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. Before working on the model. 11 In the Worksets dialog. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1.

Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. click Modify. In this case. Because this element is not owned by another user. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. and click OK. you can still edit this wall. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. If it was owned by another user. 22 Click OK. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. notice the Editable Only option. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. 24 Click OK. On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. however. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. click Worksets. 18 On the Options Bar. 23 On the File menu. If this is selected. In the Worksets dialog. click .16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Verify that it is cleared. click . Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Under Constraints. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. 21 On the Options Bar.

34 In the Type Selector. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. click Wall. click Modify. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.126mm Partition (2-hr). add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 31 On the Design Bar. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 26 Delete the door. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 29 In the Type Selector. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. The precise location is not important. select Basic Wall: Interior . click Door.

If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. two users access the central file through a network connection. For training purposes. which matches the information in the Status Bar. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. you should perform regular saves. When working in your local file. click Save to Central. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. you created your local file. and save locally immediately afterward. You modified the building model. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. add two door openings into the rooms you created. please do so before continuing. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. In this exercise. leave this file open in its current state. Borrowed Elements is selected. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. Throughout the process. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. If you have not yet completed these exercises. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. a tooltip. At the end of a work session. make elements editable. Whenever you save. you should relinquish all worksets. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. In this particular case. In addition. and reload the latest changes. displays the workset as well as the element type. it is recommended. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. By default. checked out worksets. save to central. each user must check out worksets. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. Saving your work 36 On the File menu.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes.

15 On the File menu. and select Specify. select all the User-Created worksets. specifically sequenced. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 3 On the Settings menu. click Open. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). and click OK. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. For training purposes. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 7 In the Open dialog. and select Yes for Editable. click Worksets. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. click Save As. 11 On the File menu. This file is for your use only. and reset the Username to your computer login name. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. instructions are staggered. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. return to the Settings dialog. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. and click Save. This is a system setting. and click OK. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. In the following section of this exercise. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. under Username. 4 Click the General Tab and. consider that person to be User 1. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. In addition. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. and proceed to Creating a local copy. select the central file. one user has already created a local file.rvt. User 2: Create a local file. click Options. 12 In the Save As dialog. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. 9 Click Open. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. enter User 2. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. and click OK. click Options. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . You now have a local copy of the project. skip the following section. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file.

and select Yes for Editable. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. If it is not open. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. 27 On the File menu. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. it becomes the active workset. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. click Save to Central. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. expand Views (all). If you only have one workset checked out. 23 Click OK. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. modify the building model. 17 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all).You are now the owner of that workset. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. 24 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. select the lower exterior wall. click Worksets. 19 On the File menu. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. and double-click Level 1. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. and double-click Level 1. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2.” 29 Click OK. User 1: Check out worksets. open it now.

” 35 Click OK. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays.” 39 Click OK. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. 43 In the Project Browser. select Yes for Editable. 33 On the File menu. When you save to central. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. 42 Select Furniture Layout. and click OK. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. Click Yes. right-click Level 1. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. right-click Copy of Level 1. However. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 46 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 44 In the Project Browser. The changes User 2 made are apparent. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. click Save to Central. under Views (all). click Reload Latest. click Save to Central. click Worksets. Before adding any furniture. 45 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. User 1: Reload latest worksets. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 41 On the File menu. you should create a furniture plan view. 37 On the File menu. and click OK. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. 38 In the Save to Central dialog.

click Reload Latest. click Worksets. 66 On the File menu. click Save to Central. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. the Visible by default option was not selected. are placed under Project Standards. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. 60 In the Rename dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. 61 Click OK 2 times. such as Wall Types. 49 On the Design Bar. and click inside any room. select Project Standards. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. 62 On the File menu. rather than Families. and click OK. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 65 Click OK. choose any desk.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. Therefore. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. under Show. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset.” 55 Click OK. click Rename. 48 In the Type Selector. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. 50 On the View menu. and click OK. 63 In the Worksets dialog. click Save to Central. enter Exterior Wall . 53 On the File menu. click Component. click Modify.200mm. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. NOTE System families. click Edit/New. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. click the Worksets tab. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 .

NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. In subsequent steps. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. 3 In the Save As dialog. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. leave this file open in its current state. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. finished the previous workset exercises. click Options. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. User 1: Reload latest. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. As each of you work. and save 69 On the File menu. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. select the following. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. Each user must have network access to the central file. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. select Save to Central. select Reload Latest. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). This exercise requires two users and. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you save the training file as a central file. At the appropriate point in this exercise. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. Each user checked out worksets. and these problems are rectified. 70 On the File menu. throughout this training. leave this file open in its current state. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. and click OK. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. Checking out worksets. In the final exercise of this tutorial. and published their changes back to the central file. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. click Save As. There are specific instructions for each user. and still have your local files open. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this.rvt. click Training Files. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. you need to set up your central and local files. modified the building model. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated.

click Options. 5 Click Save. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. and click Save. Set the Username to User 2. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. click Save As. and click OK. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . select the central file. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. This is the local file for User 1. In addition. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. This is a system setting. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. Next. 15 Click Open. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. and click Save. select Make this a Central File after save.4 In the File Save Options dialog. click Options. click Open. and reset the Username to your computer login name. The central file should still be open. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. click Save As. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. and select Specify. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. On the Settings menu. You have created a local file which is for your use only. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 13 In the Open dialog. and click OK. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 12 On the File menu. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. and click OK. 17 On the File menu. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. and click OK. and click OK. click Options. 6 On the File menu. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 18 In the Save As dialog. 8 In the Save As dialog. return to the Settings dialog. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive.

double-click Level 1. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 22 In the Worksets dialog. click Worksets. under Floor Plans. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. and select Yes for Editable. 29 On the Options Bar. 30 On the left exterior wall. After you submit the request. 26 In the Worksets dialog. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. and then click OK. select Exterior Shell. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. At this point. You are now the owner of that workset. click Worksets. select the Interior Layout workset. and select Yes for Editable. You are now the owner of that workset. if any User-Created worksets are not open. and click Open. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. select them. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. 24 Under Active Workset. select the second window from the top. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. and then click OK. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. verify that Editable Only is cleared. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. click the File menu. 27 Under Active Workset. select Interior Layout. Afterwards. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. and click Editing Requests. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element.

select the following. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. 36 Click Close. In this case. and the other user granted it. select Save to Central. 35 Click Grant. A message informs you that your request has been granted. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. you requested permission to edit the element. click Check Now.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. click Close. and notice the window is in the new location. select the request submitted by User 2. to Local. and close 39 On the File menu. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . 38 Click OK. In this multi-user exercise. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. and click OK. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog.

738 .

you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. In this tutorial. In this particular case. At any time in the design process. 739 . you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. Using design options. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. In addition. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. you can have multiple sets of design options. and each option set can have multiple schemes. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). For example. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. The client has asked you to create various options. After you and the client agree on the final design. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model.

and delete the unwanted options from the project. each with multiple design options. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. therefore. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). TIP In this exercise. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you design each of the structural options. the only available command is to create a new option set. you can edit it. and click Close. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. After you create a design option. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. click Training Files.In the first exercise in this lesson. 2 In the Design Options dialog. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. under Option Set. the roof and structure systems must work together. In the second exercise. you set up multiple design option sets. each is constructed for interchangeability. click New. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. With the second option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit Selected. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. make your final design decision. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set.rvt. In the final exercise of this lesson. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create.

click 12 On the Options Bar.4 In the Project Browser. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. 9 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). click Column. In this case. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. click Modify. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the View menu. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. In the following illustration. select: ■ ■ ■ . Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. add three columns. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. expand Floor Plans. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. 11 On the Edit toolbar. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. 7 In the Type Selector. By selecting Multiple. and the third column centered between the two. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. TIP To center the middle column. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. or add a dimension string between the columns. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied.

16 Zoom in around the notch construction. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. When you are finished. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. using the same technique. 17 Zoom out and. A copy of the three selected columns is added. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. Because of the size of the columns. 18 On the View toolbar.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. click . they are difficult to see in this view.

23 On the Design Bar. Adding a beam is a two-click process. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. click Modify. click Beam. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select Round Bar : 50mm. under Floor Plans. Use the following illustration as a guide. you add the beams that span the columns. double-click TOP OF CORE.Notice the 12 columns that you added. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. 19 In the Project Browser. In it. Next. The first click specifies the beam start point. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. 21 In the Type Selector. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . Zoom in on the upper right column. and click at its center to set the beam start point. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. The second click specifies the end of the beam.

select: ■ ■ ■ . 28 Zoom out. zoom into the left column. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. and select the center of the column to add a copy. 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. click . move down to the next set of columns. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. 30 On the View toolbar. click 26 On the Options Bar.25 On the Edit toolbar. and click the center point.

Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. enter Roofing for New. click Rename. under Option Set. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. under Option Set. click Rename. under Option. under Option. click Rename. click New. under Option. 41 Under Option Set. and click OK. click Rename. 37 Select Option 2 and. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. 43 In the Rename dialog. enter Beam for New. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. 32 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . click New. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). and click OK. 45 Under Roofing. 46 Under Option. 36 In the Rename dialog. 40 In the Rename dialog.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. under Option. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. name the option Louvers. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. select Option 1 (primary). 34 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK. 33 Click Finish Editing. and click OK. 38 In the Rename dialog. There should now be two roofing design options. enter Structure for New. enter Brackets for New. click New. not a new option set. click Rename.

47 Under Roofing. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. double-click ROOF TERRACE. 51 Under Edit. name the option Sunscreen. you create the second design option. click Rename. it will resemble the following illustration. 50 In the Design Options dialog. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . under Structure. select Beam. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. and click OK. Under Now Editing. 52 Click Close. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. select Edit Selected. under Floor Plans. When finished. 48 Under Option. 53 In the Project Browser. select Option 2. This allows you to more easily manage the project.

Using the Align tool requires two clicks. The second click represents the plane that is moved.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Align. 58 On the Tools menu. Refer to the following illustration. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. click Component. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 56 In the Type Selector. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. select M_Roof Beam.

64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. 62 Select the beam and. 61 On the Design Bar. The second click represents the move end point.60 After aligning the beam. click Modify. on the Edit toolbar. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . Click to indicate the end point of the move. The first click sets the move start point. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .

That is because the brackets option is set to primary. 66 On the View toolbar. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. you need this file in its current state. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. which is visible by default.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. click Finish Editing. 69 Click Close. and click Save. name the file. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. 68 In the Design Options dialog. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. click . Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . 70 On the File menu. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Notice that even before you close the dialog. 67 On the Tools menu. click Save As.rvt. m_Urban_House-in progress.

you set up multiple design option sets. expand Views (all). With the second option. a Louver system. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. each with multiple design options to pick from. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. 5 Click Close. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. click Edit Selected. 4 Under Edit. The second roofing system. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. do so now. open it now. Under Now Editing. The first option. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. delete them after the rafter is in place. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Component. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. In the next exercise. select Louvers (primary). Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. under Roofing. 6 In the Project Browser. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. Sunscreen. 2 On the Tools menu.rvt. If you need to add dimensions. expand Floor Plans. you design each of the roofing options. 3 In the Design Options dialog. 8 In the Type Selector. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. and double-click TOP OF CORE. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial.In this exercise. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 Referring to the following illustration. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. the other for beams. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options.

The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. and click OK. under Other. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. 15 On the Edit menu. 16 On the Options Bar. Select 2nd for Move To. Select Constrain. click Array. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. 13 On the Options Bar. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . click Modify. Enter 5 for Number. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 11750 mm for Length. click .

when the listening dimension displays. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. enter 990. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and press ENTER.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and.

26 On the Options Bar. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 5475 mm for Length. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . click . Enter 34 for Number. click the Edit menu.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. and click OK. 25 With the louver still selected. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. 22 On the Design Bar. click Component. 23 On the Options Bar. Select 2nd for Move To. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 20 In the Type Selector. under Other. 27 For the array starting point. Select Constrain. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. and select the louver you just placed. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. and click Array.

and press Enter. click . 29 On the View toolbar. enter 300. and. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart.28 Move the cursor vertically downward. when the listening dimension displays.

Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . 34 In the Project Browser. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. 30 On the Tools menu. click Lines. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Therefore. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. click Finish Editing. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. expand Elevations. click Edit Selected. 31 In the Design Options dialog. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. under Edit. 33 Under Editing.The louver roof system is complete. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. and click OK. 39 On the Design Bar. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. and double-click West. and then click Close. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. In this case. 40 On the Options Bar. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. select Sunscreen. click . Click OK. under Roofing. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays.

enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. Select the right arc. Under Constraints. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Constraints. 46 On the Tools menu. 43 On the Design Bar. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. The first two points define the ends of the line. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. 48 On the Design Bar. then the center arc. click Finish Sketch. 49 On the View toolbar. 41 Select the top of the left column. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. click Trim/Extend. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. click . then you can modify it through the dimension. 45 Click OK. the top of the next column on the right. The arcs should connect. and the third point defines the arc. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. click Properties. You will fix this in a later step. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. NOTE As you sketch the arcs.

You have completed the sunscreen roof system. Sunscreen. 4 In the Project Browser. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise.The louver roof system is complete. In this exercise. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. and click Rename. The second roofing system. under Edit. you select a design. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. do so now. enter Primary Option. secondary. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. and then click Close. a Louver system. and click Duplicate. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. click Save. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. under Views (all). and click OK. under Views (all). was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. 52 On the File menu. Managing Design Options In this exercise. right-click {3D}. click Finish Editing. 51 In the Design Options dialog. you need this file in its current state. and last options. tertiary. make it part of the building model. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. 50 On the Tools menu. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. 2 In the Project Browser. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. and delete the discarded design options. After exploring the combinations. Managing Design Options | 757 . expand 3D Views. The first option. under 3D Views. you designed each of the roofing options.

and click Rename. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. 11 On the View menu. under Views (all). 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. 9 Click OK. click the Design Options tab. under 3D Views. double-click Primary Option. double-click Secondary Option. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. under Views (all). Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser.5 Right-click each of the copies. 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click the Design Options tab. 7 On the View menu.

specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 19 On the View menu. 18 In the Project Browser. double-click Tertiary Option. In this case. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. and click OK. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. under Views (all). In your design options. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Last Option. Managing Design Options | 759 . click the Design Options tab.14 In the Project Browser. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 15 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab. and click OK. At this point. click Visibility/Graphics. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. under 3D Views.

click Save. click Close. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. click Delete to remove the views that used options. 29 Select Roofing. An alert is displayed. you selected a design. 35 On the File menu. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 30 Under Option Set. but should be accepted as part of the building model. the current primaries are no longer options.22 On the Tools menu. The set is deleted. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Accept Primary. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. click Yes. select Beam. 26 Under Option Set. 27 In the alert dialog. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. click Delete. 24 Under Option. double-click Primary Option. since you no longer need them. 25 Select Structure. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. 31 In the alert dialog. made it part of the building model. under Structure. select Make Primary. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. 23 In the Design Options dialog. and deleted the discarded design options. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. This was the client choice for structural. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. click Yes. In this exercise. the beam option becomes part of the model. Because the client has selected the design option. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. After exploring the combinations.

you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. demolish existing construction. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. demolish existing walls and doors. For the client. This changes room definition and total building model area. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. complete with schedules. In the lesson and exercises that follow. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. and then add new building model elements. In the second exercise. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. In the second exercise. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. 761 . You create new phases. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases.Project Phasing 22 In any project. then add new walls and doors in a different location. You create new phases.

2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Phasing. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. click Training Files. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . click (Element Properties). This means that all building model elements. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. In the Element Properties dialog. As you add new elements to the building model. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. and open Common\c_Phasing. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. During the demolition and renovation process. expand Views (all). When you create a new project. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. under Phasing. define the units. 6 On the Options Bar. you do not need to change the project units to metric. click Project Units. go to the Settings menu. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides.rvt. 4 Click Cancel. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. and click OK. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you wish to do so. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. click Modify. are visible in this view. regardless of phase. 7 Click Cancel.

under Floor Plans. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. 19 In the Project Browser. TIP If this were a multi-story building. under Floor Plans.Existing. After you create the views. under Floor Plans. Because this is a renovation project. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. and click OK. right-click Level 1. for Phase Created. Because this is a phase-specific view. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection.Existing. and click OK.Existing. right-click Level 1 . 18 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and click Rename. including the door tags. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. 20 In the Rename dialog.Demo. under Phasing. clear Door Tags. and click Rename. and click OK. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. 11 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. Phasing Your Model | 763 .Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Filter Selection). you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. right-click Copy of Level 1 . click . enter Level 1 . 16 In the Rename dialog. 14 On the Design Bar. enter Level 1 . all of the building model elements. 12 On the Options Bar. 17 Click No. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. After you release the mouse button. select Existing. are highlighted in red. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. 10 On the Options Bar.

you modify these settings. On a logical time line. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Demolished. click the Phase Filters tab. for Phase. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. There are five default phase filters. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. You may need to zoom in to see this. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 29 For Composite Plan. 27 Click New.Demo. 28 Under Filter Name. under New. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. Existing. double-click Level 1 . new construction occurs after existing construction. to which all the building model elements belong. In this case. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. under Phasing. under Floor Plans. Next. enter Composite Plan.Existing.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. double-click Level 1 . View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. select Overridden. Later in this exercise. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. under Floor Plans. however. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. and click OK. 26 In the Phasing dialog. Because of this time relationship. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. select Existing. 24 In the Project Browser. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. 21 In the Project Browser. Phase status is time-dependent. and Temporary.

This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. double-click Level 1 . When you demolish the host. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. you demolish all elements hosted by it. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. select the interior walls one at a time. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. select Demolished. 35 Click OK twice. click OK. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. select red.31 Under Phase Status.Demo. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements.Existing. double-click Level 1 . click (Demolish). Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. select a lighter blue. its display changes to a red dashed line. select the line style. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. As you click each wall. click the value for Color. 32 In the Demolished row. under Cut ➤ Lines. 34 In the Color dialog. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. or you can use the demolish tool. Phasing Your Model | 765 . There are two ways to demolish an element. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. under Floor Plans. 36 Using the same method. under Floor Plans. 39 In the Phasing dialog. you begin demolition. 42 In the Project Browser. Next.

48 Using the following illustration as a guide. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. under Phasing. click Wall. add a long horizontal wall. 52 Open Level 1 . select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". 51 Add a door leading into each room.Demo. and click OK. click Door. 47 In the Type Selector. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Existing.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). select Basic Wall: Interior . 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . for Phase Filter. under Phasing. for Phase Filter. The demolished walls no longer display. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. select Show Previous + New. 49 On the Design Bar.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. 53 Open Level 1 . 50 In the Type Selector. and click OK. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter.

All elements are displayed in this view. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter.Demo. right-click Level 1 . Phasing Your Model | 767 . click (Default 3D View). You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. and existing shows as half-tone. 61 On the View Control Bar. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. because the phase filter is set to Show All. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . regardless of phase. 60 On the View toolbar. which are displayed as red. 59 Open Level 1 . spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. The renovated building model plan is displayed. new is shown in blue. 57 In the Project Browser. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New).New.New. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 62 If necessary.

you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. and click OK. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. therefore. In the left pane of the Open dialog. As the renovation process continues. you can do so at this time. In this view. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. demolition. expand Views (all). you do not need to change the project units to metric. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. and new construction. If you wish to save this file. You can also see that the room quantities.New. sizes. the rooms change in both definition and size. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. go to the Settings menu. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style.Demo. and double-click Level 1 . click Training Files. All room boundaries are phase-specific. If you wish to do so. In the next exercise. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. 3 Open Level 1 . you can see the new walls added to the building model. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . expand Floor Plans. Notice that this view is the original building model.rvt. In this view. 63 Close the file. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial.Existing. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. click Project Units. define the units. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. 2 Open Level 1 .

In the Phasing dialog. click Room Tag. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. 5 Click OK. yet they have different room numbers. Use the following illustration as a guide.Existing. 6 Open Level 1 . 9 On the Design Bar. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. 11 On the Design Bar. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 13 Open Level 1 . 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.New. and maximize the view. click Room. click in each room as you move to the right.Demo. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . click Modify. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 10 Open Level 1 . Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. click Room.

New Construction. 20 Close the file.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. 17 On the Window menu. click Tile. 18 Open Room Schedule . In addition. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. click Close Hidden Windows. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. The two schedule views tile. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. and double-click Room Schedule . expand Schedules/Quantities. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. 16 In the Project Browser. In this case. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. View phase-specific room schedules. 19 On the Window menu.Existing. In this exercise. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms.

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. performance. 771 . Comparison of alternatives on a site. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. and manage the links throughout the project. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. In the final lesson. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. You position the building models on the site plan. This maximizes efficiency. In this tutorial. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. In these situations. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. modify their visibility.

One building model is a condominium. You position the building models on the site. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. You link two building models to the project. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . and the other is a townhouse. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. modify their visibility. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed.Linking Building Models In this lesson. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it.

The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. 4 On the File menu. c_Townhouse.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. in the Model Linking folder that you created. this system is not exposed to the user. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. select the three files. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . Auto . 8 Clear Read-only. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu.rvt.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. All three files now reside. RELATED See the lesson. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. click Close. Select c_Site. click Open. click Open.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. click Save As.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. Otherwise. 2 On the File menu. Click Open. Manual . NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. 5 On the File menu. you can do so. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. This option is grayed out. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. and open Common\c_Site. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. right-click. with write permission. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. c_Condo_Complex. and save the file there. click Training Files. this option will place the link at a predefined location. however. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. ■ ■ Manual . and click Properties. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used.■ Auto .

NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. 13 Click Open.Origin to Origin. If you wish to do so. 10 In the Project Browser. you can go to the Settings menu. expand Floor Plans. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. For Positioning. 11 On the File menu. expand Views (all). select Auto . and make your changes. and double-click Level 1. you do not need to change the project units to metric. click Project Units. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. Notice the blue detail lines. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Import/Link ➤ Revit.

The first click specifies the move start point.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. The linked model moves as one object. 15 On the Edit toolbar. After you select it. Standard move commands work with linked building models. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. click (Move). similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. 17 For the move endpoint. 16 For the move start point. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. The Move command requires two clicks. The second click specifies the move endpoint. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it.rvt displays in the Type Selector.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and select c_Townhouse. For Positioning. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. select Auto . 21 Click Open. 18 On the View menu. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder.Origin to Origin. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .After you specify the location to move to. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu.

and then click to specify the end of the rotation. and click to specify the end of the rotation. when the vertical line displays. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. To rotate an object.The townhouse building model displays above the site model. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. 23 On the Edit toolbar. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . you first specify the rotation start point. click to specify the rotation start point. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. click (Rotate). 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. In this case.

778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. click (Move). Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration.

The first click specifies the start point.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. click (Copy). 30 For the starting point. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. The Copy command works much like the Move command. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. and the second click specifies the copy-to point. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse.

under Identity data. 37 On the View toolbar. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. enter Townhouse A. 34 On the Options Bar. for Name. click (Default 3D View). if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. 32 On the Edit menu. click . 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. click Rotate. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and click OK. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. use the Move command to make any adjustments.

Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . When you originally linked the files. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. After linking the files. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 2 On the SteeringWheels. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. you need this project file open and in this view. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. click Save. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. they were placed too low within the site topography. do so before continuing. click and hold Orbit. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. In this exercise. click (SteeringWheels). In the next exercise. you modify the elevation of the townhouses.38 On the File menu. In this exercise.

In this case. under Views (all). To do this. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. When using the Align command. 7 On the Tools toolbar. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. and then select the plane that you want to align. and double-click South. and click to select the line. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. 3 In the Project Browser. you first select the plane you want to align to. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. click (Align). clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. and click OK.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. and click to select it. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. when it highlights.rvt. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. expand Elevations. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. In the steps that follow. Click the Revit Links tab. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. the status bar displays the name of the linked file.

Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . This would over-constrain the model. click (Default 3D View). click 13 On the View toolbar. 9 In the Project Browser. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. click and hold Orbit.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. click Save. under Elevations. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. (SteeringWheels). 11 Return to the South elevation view. double-click North. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. 12 On the View toolbar. 15 On the File menu. 14 On the SteeringWheels.

8 For Annotation Categories. 9 Under Visibility. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. In the next exercise. do so before continuing. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. and the halftone settings for each linked project. By linked view. click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. expand c_Townhouse. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. When you link a file. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. double-click South. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. scroll down and clear Levels. under Elevations. display settings. or Custom. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. 4 Under Visibility. As you can see. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. 2 On the View menu. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. you can independently control the visibility settings. click Custom. 10 Click OK. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. If the Basics page is set to Custom. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. In this exercise. click the Revit Links tab. the defaults are set to By host view for all options.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views.rvt. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. select <Custom>. you need this project file open and in this view. click By Host View. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. detail level.rvt. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

and then set the detail level to coarse.rvt. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. under Display Settings. double-click Level 1. By default. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. medium. select <Custom>. 20 For c_Townhouse. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. 14 On the View menu. under Floor Plans. 16 Under Visibility. expand c_Townhouse. Using the Custom option. click the Revit Links tab. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. and click OK. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. With linked files. 24 Click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. or fine.rvt. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser.rvt. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. By selecting custom under Model Categories. click the Revit Links tab. on the Basics tab.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. You can click the value for Detail Level. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Custom. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. click By Host View. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. In this case. no detail level changes are required. 23 In the Model categories list. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project.

click Custom for the Townhouse link. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. this is preferable. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. In this case. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. there are situations. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. under Visibility. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. on a sloped site for instance. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. All other components are grayed out. you need this project file open and in this view. 26 Under Display Settings. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. 29 Click OK. In this exercise. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. select c_Townhouse. click Save. and phase filter of a specific link.rvt. However. all new. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. 25 On the Revit Links tab. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. In most cases. With the Show All filter applied. 28 Select By linked view for View range.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. 31 On the File menu. phase. click OK. demolished. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In this case. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . existing. By default. In the next exercise. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. you manage the linked files.

2 In the Manage Links dialog. the link is maintained. and Saved Path fields are read only. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. The default path type is Relative. Notice the Loaded. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . 3 Under Path Type. click Manage Links. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. select c_Condo_Complex. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. In general. 6 At the confirmation prompt. 7 Click OK. In a shared coordinate environment. 5 Click Unload. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models.rvt. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. click Yes. They supply information regarding the links. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. 4 Under Linked File. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. do so before continuing.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. click the Revit tab. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Locations Not Saved. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. You learn more about this in the next lesson.

go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. the link is not loaded. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. To do this.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. expand Revit Links. When you initially place the link.rvt. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. In general. and click Reload. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. However. 9 On the File menu. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. and select Specify. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. right-click c_Condo_Complex. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. click the arrow next to the Open button. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. In these cases. 8 In the Project Browser. click Save As. If you choose not to open that workset. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files.

the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . you are establishing a shared origin point. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). If you have not completed the previous lesson.10 In the Save As dialog. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. In this exercise. name the file Site_Project. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. and the resulting project files. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. In essence. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. When you share coordinates between projects. leave the project file open in its current view. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. do so before continuing. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. In the next lesson. The host file consists primarily of site components. When used in conjunction with model linking. and save it as an RVT file.

It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. In this case. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. When you are working in the host project. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. 2 On the Tools menu. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. If you have not completed the lesson. If you have closed the project. click Open. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt and click Open. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Select Site_Project.coordinates are used. Linking Building Models on page 772. open it before continuing. and the resulting project files. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. 3 In the drawing area. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. click the Condo Complex. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. do so before continuing. As indicated in the Status Bar.

An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. However. do so before continuing. click to select it. These three locations can be named Lot A. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. it is placed at a specific location. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. In this exercise. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. On the Status Bar. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. when the edges highlight. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. If you have not completed the exercise. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. but can have multiple additional locations. this location is not saved outside of the host project. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . 5 On the Design Bar. you need this project file open and in this view. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. even though both models originate from one linked file. Lot B. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. and Lot C. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. select Location 1. and click OK. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson.

notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. . Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. click Rename. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. This is a one-time operation. click Not Shared for Shared Location. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. In the Choose Location dialog. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. When constraining a link to a location. Record the current position as a location. 9 In the Select Location dialog. click OK. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. 7 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Not Shared for Shared Location. click Reconcile. under Instance Parameters. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 12 On the Options Bar. select Move instance to. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. click . click Change. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.2 On the Options Bar. enter Lot A for New. and click OK. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. under Instance Parameters. 4 Under Value.

make sure Lot B is selected. the active location position is moved. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. click the Revit tab. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. a warning displays. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. and click OK.Notice the OK button is not active. ignore the warning. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Because Lot A is currently in use. Notice the OK button is still not active. Record current position as. or cancel the action. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. By relocating a project. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. 26 Click OK. and click OK. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. The first click specifies the move start point. click OK. click Duplicate. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. click OK. 16 Click Change. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . click Manage Links. When you create a location. When you release the mouse button. and then select the townhouse project. 30 On the Tools menu. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 19 In the Select Location dialog. Save locations 21 On the File menu. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. you cannot redefine its location. This is a two-click process. The second click specifies the move endpoint. When you relocate a project. and click OK. select Save. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. To explicitly save a location. and the left townhouse resides at that location. 23 Click Save Locations. select the second option. enter Lot B for Name. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. You created the Lot A location in previous steps.

click Close. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. you work in one of the linked projects. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. select Save. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. 34 On the File menu. and click OK. 33 On the Edit menu. 36 On the File menu.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. NOTE In the following exercise. In this exercise. click Save.

The current active location is Lot A. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. If you have not completed the exercises. Click Open. double-click 1st Floor.rvt file. Select c_Condo_Complex.By Shared Coordinates. In addition. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. 2 On the File menu. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. if other models were linked into the same host. When opening the linked file. select Auto . 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. For Positioning. it is placed automatically within the host project. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files.rvt file. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. click Open. under Floor Plans. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. In this exercise. do so before continuing. Also. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. Because this building model only has one named location.

and click Make Current.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. In this exercise. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. do so before continuing. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and click OK. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. 6 Select Lot B. click Manage Place and Locations. click Duplicate. If you have not completed the exercises. enter Lot C. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. In the next exercise. you create a new location. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. select True North for Orientation. and click OK. 3 In the Name dialog. 7 Click OK. In this exercise. In the host file. click OK. you manage the shared locations. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. click Manage Place and Locations. under Graphics. click View Properties. orient a view to true north. you can select Lot C if necessary. you need this project file open and in this view. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.

Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Close. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . In this exercise. click Open. do so before continuing. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin.rvt and click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. On the Options Bar. 10 On the File menu. Select Site_Project. If you have not completed the exercise. You can save the file if you wish. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files.

select Doors. under Category. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Count. and click Add.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click the Fields tab. 5 Under Available fields. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Schedule/Quantities. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files.

and then click OK twice. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. expand Schedules/Quantities. select Family and Type for Sort by. click Save. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. under Other. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. 13 On the File menu. 12 Select Grand totals. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. You have completed this tutorial. click Close. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. and click Properties. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . clear Itemize every instance. 14 On the File menu. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. right-click Door Schedule.8 Click OK.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. click Browse. and click OK. you create an office template. In the second lesson. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. selection default options. 11 Under Colors. 10 In the Options dialog. journal cleanup options. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 4 Under Colors. notification preferences. Notice that the drawing area is black. select Invert background color. 6 In the New Project dialog. click OK. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. In the first lesson. which is independent of the project settings. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. 8 In the New Project dialog. 803 . you modify the system environment. click Training Files. and set it as your default template. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. click the Graphics tab. 3 In the Options dialog. and your username when using worksets. click the Graphics tab. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. Finally. they are not saved to project files or template files.rte. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. These settings control the graphics. under Template file. click the value for Selection color.

click Wall. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Modify. 15 Click OK. 22 When prompted to save changes. 19 On the Design Bar. select yellow. click No. and open Metric\m_Settings. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element.12 In the Color dialog. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. For Selection color. 26 In the Options dialog. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. However. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. click the Graphics tab. click Training Files. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 13 Click the General tab. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 14 Under Notifications. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. clear Invert background color. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. For Tooltip assistance. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. and select the wall. select One hour. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select red. click Modify. select None. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed.rvt. the elements causing the error display using this color. 18 On the Design Bar. When an error occurs. and click OK.

Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Under Journal File Cleanup. 10 In the Places dialog. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. This path is set automatically during the installation process. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. click Browse.27 Click the General tab. TIP To view a template. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. click Browse. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. 8 Click Cancel. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. These files are used in the software support process. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click Open. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. However. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. you specify default file locations. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. such as in a large. If prompted. family template files. For Tooltip assistance. do not save the changes. 4 Click Cancel. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. 7 In the Options dialog. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. under Default path for family template files. Under Username. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. select Normal. centralized. 2 In the Options dialog. click Browse. Your login name displays by default. click the File Locations tab. and click Browse to select a template. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. and family libraries. click Places. select the folder to save your files to by default. 3 Under Default template file. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. notice the list of library names. you can start a new project with that template. including your default project template. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. 5 Under Default path for user files. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. select your preferred Save reminder interval. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). Specifying File Locations In this exercise. Specifying File Locations on page 805.

and click the icon side of the field. In the following illustration. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. click (Add Value). templates. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. Save. and change the name to My Library. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. or families. or loading a Revit Architecture file. and Import dialogs. saving. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. Load. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. 11 In the Places dialog.library names and path. When you are opening. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. and select it as the library path. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. under Libraries. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and you can create new libraries. and click Open.

9 In the text editor. scroll down the list of building industry terms. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Under Settings. (Remove Value) to delete the library. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. custom color files. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. click Edit. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. and decal image files. Save. 5 In the text editor. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. and click OK twice. click the My Library icon. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. and Import dialogs. Load. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. If you want to relocate this path. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. click Edit. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 22 Click Places. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. specify the new location here. 23 Select My Library. 2 In the Options dialog. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. click My Library. 19 Click Cancel. 21 Click the File Locations tab. 15 Under Library Name. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. If you work in a large office. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . 24 Click 25 Click OK. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. such as bump maps. 28 Click OK. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. view the current path. click the Spelling tab. This path is determined during installation. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths.

22 In the text editor. 23 In the Options dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 20 Under Personal dictionary. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. under Template file. 21 In the text editor. click Restore Defaults. click OK. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.11 In the Options dialog. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. click the Spelling tab. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. As you zoom in and out within a view. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. In this exercise. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. you modify snap settings. click OK. You can turn snap settings on and off. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 19 Under Settings. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 14 Click in the drawing area. click Edit. 18 In the Options dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. click Modify. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click Browse. delete sheetmtl-CU. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. 12 On the Standard toolbar. click default template. 4 In the New Project dialog. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. click OK. click Text. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click File menu ➤ Save. do not save the changes. you modify snap increments. work with snapping turned off. If prompted. click Training Files. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration.rte. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase.

While sketching. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. zoom out until it does so. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. clear Chain. click Wall. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . snapping reverts to the system default settings.6 Under Dimension Snaps. If you do not have a wheel button. For example. 8 In the Snaps dialog. enter SM. TIP To zoom while sketching. click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . 7 Under Object Snaps. and enter 500 . such as ZO to zoom out. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. and move the cursor to the right. If it does not. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. use the wheel button on your mouse. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action.

and the wall edges. 24 Click OK. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. and specify the wall endpoint. and click Wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. click Modify. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. Notice that snapping is once again active. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. the midpoint. and delete the value 500 . the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. 21 Move the cursor downward. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 18 Enter SM. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. it will snap to the endpoints. Modifying Project Settings on page 811. If you move the cursor along the wall. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. and do not save the file. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. and move the cursor to the right. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. Do not set the wall end point. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. This is the increment that you added previously.

you render a region to observe the changes. You create and modify materials. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. Modifying Project Settings | 811 .rvt. fill patterns. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. lines. Finally. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. In the steps that follow. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. and object styles. Using these options. save the project file with a unique name. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. When you apply a material to an element. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. and use it to complete the remaining exercises.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. annotations. click Training Files. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. and open Metric\m_Settings. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a new material and apply it to a model element.

13 Select the lower exterior wall.Fieldstone. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. 11 Click OK. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. When a model element is loaded into a project. 3 Click (Duplicate). 9 Click Apply. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. select Stone. and texture of the material. In the next exercise. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. 6 Click Replace. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click 02 Entry Level. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. this material provides a starting point for the new material. scale. and click OK. and click (Element Properties). 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. In the Materials dialog. for Class. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. enter Masonry .Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. Masonry . In the steps that follow. These details will display in rendered images.Fieldstone material.Stone. and click OK. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. However. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. and select Masonry . read-only library for render appearances. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. When you change properties of a render appearance. The properties describe the color. The Render Appearance Library is a local. 10 Click the Graphics tab. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone.Fieldstone. 2 Scroll down the materials list. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class.

click This is the material that you created. .Brick.Fieldstone.Fieldstone. 18 For Finish 1. 17 For Structure. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . click (Default 3D View). 20 In the Materials dialog. 19 On the right side of the Material field. Fieldstone on CMU. click Edit. and click OK. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. click Model Graphics Style. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 16 Enter the new wall name. select the rear exterior wall. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. 21 Click OK three times. click Edit/New. 15 Click Duplicate. and click OK. 22 Select the left exterior wall. select Masonry . 25 On the View toolbar. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . click in the Material field. 26 On the View Control Bar.14 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 While pressing CTRL. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 24 In the Type Selector.

and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. click Render. The rendering process begins. 32 In the Rendering dialog. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. select Low or Medium. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. click Rendering Dialog. 31 In the Rendering dialog.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. and click Rendering. 29 In the 3D view. select Region. under Quality. select the render region (a red rectangle). for Setting. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 28 In the Rendering dialog. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . right-click the Design Bar. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. In the following exercise. When finished.

m_Settings-in progress. 7 Under Custom. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. and double-click West. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. expand Elevations. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . click Show the model. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. such as steel. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. Drafting pattern density is fixed.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. select Custom. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall.rvt. Then click Render again. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. and clear Region. 3 Under Pattern Type. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Click New. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Zoom into the model. choose Model. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. click Import. in the Rendering dialog. 33 In the Rendering dialog. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise.

(Element Properties). 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Click OK three times. click to select a fill pattern. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . and open Common\Fieldstone_Model.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. 18 Under Surface Pattern. 23 On the Design Bar. click in the Material field. and click OK. click Modify. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. In the Materials dialog. 21 In the Materials dialog. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click OK. It is currently assigned the material Masonry .pat. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. enter . 13 On the Options Bar. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Training Files. and for Import scale. click 15 For Structure. click Edit/New. and click OK. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. click .Fieldstone.56. under Pattern Type. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. 11 Click OK. select fldstn. 9 Under Custom. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern.Fieldstone material. select Model. for Finish 1. click Edit. 10 For Name. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. enter Fieldstone.

and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. For example. m_Settings-in progress. click (Default 3D View). Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. 2 On the keyboard. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). adjust your zoom settings as needed. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. expand 3D Views. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. you can set the window frame material to By Category. there are often multiple window types within a project. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3 Windows.rvt. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.25 On the View toolbar. TIP If the pattern does not display.

click Edit/New. click By Category (located under the materials list). 16 On the Design Bar. . click By Category. click (Element Properties). click (Element Properties). and click 15 Click OK twice. and click . 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. click Modify.3 On the View Control Bar. click Edit/New. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 9 Click OK twice. 14 In the Materials dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. for Trim Exterior Material. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value column. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. 10 Select the arched window. click in the Value column. for Trim Exterior Material. 11 On the Options Bar. 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under Materials and Finishes.

29 In the Materials dialog. descriptions. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. When you render a 3D view. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. type red. or keywords include the word red. expand Windows. and select Trim. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. . 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . (Duplicate). 23 Click Replace.red paint. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. click in the Material column. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. 18 On the Model Objects tab. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. 28 Under Shading.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click OK. and click OK. click OK. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. select Trim. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. 19 For Trim. for Class. select Paint. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. and click OK. enter Trim . the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. 25 In the search field. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. for Name.

m_Settings-in progress. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. select Red. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. (Default 3D view). click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. Now that you have created a line pattern. under Category. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. select Roof Line. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. for Name. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. click New. m_Settings-in progress. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 11 For Line Pattern. 10 For Line Color. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. enter Roof Line.rvt.rvt. is open with the 3D view active.31 On the View toolbar. 7 On the View Control Bar. select Roofs.

13 In the Project Browser. Notice that the line color displays in this view. but not the line pattern. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. click Model Graphics Style. and verify that Hidden Line is selected.12 Click OK. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . under 3D Views. 14 On the View Control Bar. double-click to Building.

and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Black. select Roof Line. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. elevations. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. under Category. For Color. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. select Roofs. Plans. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. 18 For Line Color. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Blue. for Visibility. For Pattern. 22 On the Model Categories tab. click Override. select 5. 20 Click OK. double-click 03 Roof. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. 19 For Line Pattern. under Floor Plans. sections. select Solid. select Roofs. 15 In the Project Browser. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view.

32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. 31 Click OK. under Modify Subcategories. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. and click OK. (Line). 28 In the Line Styles dialog. select 2. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. For Line Pattern. select Red. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 .25 Click OK twice. 29 For Name. select Level: 02 Entry Level. 34 On the Options Bar. This places the line above the topography. Notice the site topography and the property lines. For Line Color. specify the following: ■ For Plane. under Floor Plans. select Zoning Setback. 33 In the Type Selector. enter Zoning Setback. click Lines. click New. select Double dash. Click Click (Draw).

and then clear Property Lines. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 38 On the Model Categories tab. select it. double-click 02 Entry Level. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. (Default 3D View). as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. 36 On the View toolbar.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. and clear Zoning Setback. expand Lines. Modifying Annotations on page 825. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 40 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. 43 Click OK. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and clear Property Lines. 44 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). 39 Click OK. NOTE If Site is not selected. under Floor Plans. and clear Zoning Setback. Expand Site. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.rvt. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. select Feet and fractional inches. and then click outside the second wall. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. 9 In the Type Selector. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. for Units Format. m_Settings-in progress. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. 4 Enter the name Linear . you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. click another wall. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. click Duplicate. click Modify. and place a dimension on the floor plan.rvt. To place a dimension. select Linear . You have created a new dimension style. 10 On the Standard toolbar. 7 Click OK twice. under Floor Plans. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.Imperial and click OK. (Undo). m_Settings-in progress. Modifying Annotations | 825 . 5 Under Text. double-click 02 Entry Level.Imperial.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. click one wall. For Units. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. click the default value.

15 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 On the west wall. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. In the preview image. Then press Delete. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows.14 On the Options Bar.Number is now the assigned tag. click (Element Properties). click Tag ➤ By Category. In the steps that follow. 23 Click OK. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. 24 While pressing CTRL. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 16 Click Cancel. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. 28 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Tags dialog. 19 Click Load. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. click Tag All Not Tagged. Leave M_Window Tag . 18 In the Tags dialog. click M_Window Tag . scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . scroll down to Windows. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 22 Under Loaded Tags. click Training Files.Number as the assigned tag. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. notice that the label displays 1i. click the bottom window.Number. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. clear Leader.Number. under Category.rfa. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the 3 window tags. 26 On the Options Bar.

For Unit symbol. select Faces. verify that Create is clear. 3 In the Format dialog. click the default value. 32 On the View toolbar. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. Unless overridden. dimensions use these project settings. 9 Under Doors and Windows. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project.rvt. 2 In the Project Units dialog. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. the other displays the instance value. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. In the first section. dimension values display using this setting. for Area. Temporary Dimensions. and click OK. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. and click OK. 6 Click OK. and Detail Level Options | 827 . and Detail Level Options on page 827. Click OK. notice Window Tags appears twice. In the final section. M_Window Tag . you modify the detail level assignments. Specifying Units of Measurement. Unless overridden. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. click the default value. select meters squared. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and click OK.Number. (Default 3D View). select To the nearest 100. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. 8 Under Walls. for Rounding. 30 Under Leader. you modify the temporary dimension settings.Under Category. Specifying Units of Measurement. click Modify. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding.Temporary Dimensions. 4 In the Project Units dialog. In the second section. m_Settings-in progress. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. you specify the project units of measurements. select 0 decimal places. Specifying Units of Measurement. select Openings. for Length. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. 31 On the Design Bar.Temporary Dimensions.

Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. In this table. In this exercise. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. expand Floor Plans. and expand 3D Views. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save.In this project. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. 12 Click OK. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. You do not select a view scale to move it. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. click Training Files. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. click . 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (all).

3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. 5 On the Views tab. expand both the Architectural and Structural views.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . and notice that each is grouped by discipline. 8 Select Phase. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . In the Project Browser. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . and click OK. and click OK. notice that views are grouped by phase. expand Sheets (all). 10 In the Project Browser. select Discipline.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. select Type/Discipline. expand each view type. and click Apply. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. 6 In the Project Browser. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number.

17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click New. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. 16 Click the Views tab. click the Folders tab. under Sheets. expand each sheet set. and click OK. and click OK. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 14 In the Project Browser. 12 Click the Sheets tab.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.

Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. navigate to your preferred directory. you create an office template. Proceed to the next lesson. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. the same rules apply. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. when you create a new project. and click OK. In this lesson. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. View Type (Family and Type). You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. Creating an Office Template | 831 . you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. expand 3D Views. 21 In the Project Browser. You can also save these settings in a template file. In the lesson that follows. If you want to save this file. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. and click Open.rte template. and expand both Architectural and Structural. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. When you create a new template based on an existing template. and Discipline. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. you select the starting point for your office template. levels. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. enter a unique file name. click Browse. 2 Under Template file. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. When you create new projects. click Training Files. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. under Views. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. and open Metric\Templates. Whenever you create a new project or template. In that case. and view names. You can choose from several templates. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. and click OK. expand Complete. Creating an Office Template on page 831. For example. dimensions styles. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office.

13 Select the default template. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. 7 In the Project Browser. select Project. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. If you want to use a template other than the default. If you have additional projects open. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. select Project template. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. 14 Click Open. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. 12 Under Template File. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. 9 In the Project Browser. you can select it now. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. and click OK. for Create new. In this exercise. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. and double-click North. When you create the material. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. For example. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. 6 Click OK. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . in the drawing area. you modify the project settings for your new template. close them. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. drag a zoom region around the level heads. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. click Browse. 15 Under Create new. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.5 In the New Project dialog. weights.

and similar attributes. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. the changes are saved as part of the project template. including color. or refer to the online help. line colors. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. For more information. rotate. or modify existing patterns. 9 Click OK when finished. TIP For more information about creating new materials. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. create new subcategories. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. and change render appearance properties. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. and scroll through the list of categories. see the previous lesson. 2 Scroll down the materials list. Observe the materials that are already defined. You can align. For more details on modifying these settings. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. If you change render appearance properties. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. Modifying System Settings on page 803. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. create and modify them as needed. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. 4 Click Replace.During this exercise. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. annotation objects. When you create or modify a material. and move model patterns. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. texture. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. specific modifications are not dictated. You do this by defining the render appearance. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. you can set line weights. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. line patterns. and materials for model objects. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . and imported objects. 13 If necessary. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. see a preview of the rendered material. transparency. In the Object Styles dialog. or refer to the online help.

19 If necessary. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. 29 Click OK. select it. or line pattern as needed. 20 Click OK. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . modify the line weight. and specify the properties. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. 32 To modify a line pattern. such as section lines and dimension lines. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. create new line subcategories. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. You can add and delete view scales.15 Modify categories. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. select it from this list. and dimensions. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. click Duplicate. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. line color. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. and click Edit. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 18 For existing line categories. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. name the style. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. To see the details of a particular style. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. tags. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. 34 Click OK. and create new subcategories as needed. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles.

and specify the properties. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. and click OK. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. In the Tags dialog. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. click Format. and radial dimensions are modified separately. name the style. To see the details of a particular style. 61 Under Doors and Windows. 58 Click OK. For example. 62 Click OK. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. angular. TIP In the drawing area. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. and Angle settings. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. 53 For Length. Volume. 55 Click OK. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. click Load.40 Click OK. and choose a decimal symbol. Linear. 46 Click OK. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. 50 To load new annotation tags. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. 60 Under Walls. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. when you add a door with the tag option selected. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. 57 Specify the Slope option. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. select it from this list. click Duplicate. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector.

Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. To move the view scales. Links to associated tutorials are provided. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. When you create a new view. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. rename. click the arrows between columns. create new browser organization types. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 68 Delete. 64 Review the table. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. In a typical project. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. See Setting up If necessary. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. Medium. In such a case. or edit existing organization types. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. 71 Delete. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. You can find additional information in Help. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. or Fine. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. For example. 69 If necessary. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. rename. 70 Click the Sheets tab. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. or edit existing organization types. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. create new browser organization types. If you routinely create the same documentation sets.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. The detail level is based on view scale. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. 72 If necessary. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. click the Views tab. However. 73 Click OK. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. Use the table below as a checklist. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. Using the arrows between the columns. 65 Click OK. Although these settings can be saved within a template. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. and move view scales as needed. and make modifications in each area as necessary. Each command is available on the Settings menu.

Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. you could load detail components. 2 In the Type Selector. you do both.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. there are some important thoughts to consider. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. phase filters. You can load any family or group into a template. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. For example. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. you can set up the phases. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. modify. you can move onto the next component type. if you load every available window type. For example. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. Depending on the intended use of this template. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. title blocks. However. or add to this selection. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. and the poche depth. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. notice the list of doors already loaded. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. If this selection is satisfactory. furniture. In addition. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. you can set the default contour line interval. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Door. In the steps that follow. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. and electrical fixtures. If necessary. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. you may want to delete. the section cut material. Although the options are endless. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. Although this is possible. do so before starting this exercise. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . or use the Project Browser. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. or electrical fixtures.

In the Element Properties dialog. expand Families. click Load. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. Notice that each family category is listed.3 To modify. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. create. Click Duplicate. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. create. Make modifications. In the Element Properties dialog. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. and click OK. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Navigate to the directory containing the door type. click Bar. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. click Edit/New. Select it. and click OK. and click OK. or modify a door. and click Open. or load a new door type. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. Modify type properties. Enter a name.

Detail Level. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. click 12 Click Preview. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. (Element Properties). View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. you create the views required for your template. 11 On the Options Bar. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. right-click the component. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. and select the title block type. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. 13 Click OK. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. load. To do so. To load a title block. click Load. This title block is currently part of the template.) 10 Expand the title block. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. In addition. you created new projects using different templates. In addition. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. View Range. Discipline. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. In this exercise. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . and click Delete. create.

15 In the Project Browser. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. you can apply a view template to any view. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. select Architectural Plan. under Elevations. 11 Click Apply. the view is not linked to the template in any way. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. you will first modify view templates. double-click South. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. In addition. under Floor Plans. After applying the template. select Site Plan. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template.settings of categories and subcategories. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. click Apply. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. In this exercise. 6 Click OK. and then click OK. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. click Apply. and click OK. 4 If necessary. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. Every time a new plan view is created. 2 Under Names. open the view from the Project Browser. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 12 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. and double-click Level 1. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. and click OK. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. and apply the appropriate template. double-click Site. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. At any time. 18 If you modified any other view templates. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template.

and click Rename. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click the ViewCube. right-click the ViewCube. in the Project Browser. click Orient to a Direction. expand 3D Views. click Orient to View. 20 In the Project Browser. Blue level heads have associated plan views. a face. on the View toolbar. and click Properties. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. 22 In the Project Browser. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Make Plan View. under Floor Plans. notice that you have the option to rename. If you want to modify view properties. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. and click Save View. or an edge of the ViewCube. or delete this view. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . and select the desired direction. enter a view name. 30 In the Project Browser. To orient the 3D view to a direction. 23 To add more levels to the template. review the floor plans. 21 In the Project Browser. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. click 29 In the Project Browser. right-click the ViewCube. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. right-click Level 1. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. and. right-click the view name. To orient the 3D view to another view. review the existing floor plans. under 3D Views. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template.Notice the level names. click Schedule/Quantities. under Floor Plans. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. or delete them as needed. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. in the shortcut menu. and select the desired view. If it does not display. 27 Create additional levels as needed. use the ViewCube. (Default 3D View). duplicate. Black level heads have no associated views. and elevations. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. If prompted. 31 Rename the 3D View. duplicate. click Level. ceiling plans. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. Rename. right-click {3D}. By default. 24 On the Options Bar.

Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. and click OK. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. select the default title block. select the category type. and modify their properties accordingly. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created.You can add schedules to a template. assign filters. After the sheet is created. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. modify settings as needed. modify settings as needed. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. on the View tab of the Design Bar. You are prompted to select a title block. select the title block and delete it. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Select a view. or exportlayersdgn. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. You can still add views to the sheet. 42 Create new sheets as needed. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. On the Appearance tab. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. click Sheet. and click OK. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. expand Sheets (all). 37 Click OK. in the Project Browser. On the Formatting tab. 40 To add views to the sheet. To do so. On the Filter tab. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click Rename. To later add a title block to a sheet. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. Right-click the sheet name. click Add View. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. select and order required fields.txt for MicroStation). The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. modify settings as needed. and click OK. When you import a DWG or DXF file. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select one.txt for AutoCAD.

doors.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. project parameters. 9 Click Save As. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. You can save these mappings to a text file. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. for example. name the file. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. name the file. For example. and related multi-category tags and schedules. When scheduling. They cannot be shared with other projects. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. select Save As. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. windows. name the file. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Save. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. and so on. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. click Save As. and click Save. and they become the set mappings for the project. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. 5 For each category. 8 In the dialog. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. 2 For each category. When you import a DWG or DXF file. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. therefore. and so on. When you create a multi-category schedule. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. and click Save. These settings are retained within the project template. Using shared parameters. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters.

Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. and specify its discipline and type. project parameters. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. 5 Enter the group name. click New. 19 Under Group parameter under. for Name. 17 Under Discipline. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. 8 Under Parameters. you can create a list of parameters.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. select a parameter discipline type. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select Project parameter. under Groups. If this template will be used by multiple team members. If a file already exists. click New. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. For each parameter group. 3 Name and save the file. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 22 Click OK. 24 To add a shared project parameter. and select Shared Parameter. and click OK. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. add required parameters. 6 Create as many groups as needed. 16 Under Parameter Data. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. select a group to add parameters to. 9 Name the parameter. 25 Click Select. you may want to save the file to a network location. and choose a shared parameter. enter a parameter name. 11 For each parameter group. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. 26 Click OK. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. 14 Click Add. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. select a parameter value type. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. 23 Add project parameters as needed. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 21 Under Categories. 18 Under Type of Parameter. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. click Add. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 10 Click OK. because each office has a unique set of needs. 2 Click Create.

Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you can set options such as sheet sizes. 35 For Name. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. you can load them into the template. For information on creating multi-category tags. and make it your default template file. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. 3 Under Settings. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. select Multi-Category. click Schedule/Quantities. 2 Under Printer. and the percent of actual size. By creating named settings within the template. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. and click OK. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. The tag is now part of the template. save the file as a template. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. By going first to the Print command. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. 34 For Category. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. and print. you need only select a setting. 5 Click Save As. paper placement. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . Click OK. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. In this exercise. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. make minor modifications if necessary. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. click OK.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. For each printer. and click Open. you create named print settings. 6 In the New dialog. 4 Modify the printer settings. 37 When you have completed the schedule. 32 Navigate to the directory. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. 28 Click OK. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. enter a name for the schedule. for Name. select the tag. or refer to the online help. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. click Setup.

you ensure that office standards are maintained. In addition. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. 11 Click Close when finished. In this lesson. modify the printer settings. 18 Click Browse. 15 Name the template. 19 Select the template. select Template Files (*. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. This can provide a good starting point for a template. The only remaining task is to save it. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. 20 Click OK. click Setup. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. By investing the time to individualize your template. click Save as. enter a new name for the printer. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . If you have a project. select a different printer. You can also set this template as your default template. 22 Click the File Locations tab. 14 Under Save as type. save it in a network location. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. Your template is complete. loaded components. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 24 Navigate to the template location. and click Open. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. If you need to share this file with others. select it. and click OK. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. Create additional settings as needed. 23 For Default template file. and saved them to a template. click Browse. 10 Repeat these steps as needed.rte). Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. you modified settings. 9 In the Print dialog. In addition. 25 Click OK. and click Save. and create new settings for this printer. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. and click Open. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful